general description form for teaching tools · list of tool files tempo_training manual.pdf slides...

281
General description form for teaching tools In order to have a comprehensive general description of the teaching tool, please adhere to this format (fill in table at the end of the document, using the following instructions): 1. The title. a. It should be descriptive, brief, and always contain i. What kind of tool it is (for example, facilitator guide, simulated patient case, etc) ii. Which audience it is for iii. Which topic it covers iv. Which language it is in [in brackets] b. Example: Simulated patient case on dental patients with high anxiety for dental students [German] 2. The language of the tool. a. Describe what language the actual tool you are submitting is in – we welcome tools in all languages. b. If the tool is available in other languages, please also indicate this and if possible, submit examples of the tool in each language available. c. Example: German (also available in English) 3. For which audience? a. The audience whom this tool has been used with should be described. We recognize that some tools are for very specific audiences (for example, 2nd year dental students), while others might be used with a broad range of health professional learners (for example, bad news cases for any level of medical learner) This field should contain i. Information about profession(s) the tool has been used with (medicine, dentistry, nursing, other) ii. Information about level(s) of learner the tool has been used with (undergraduate, postgraduate, other)

Upload: others

Post on 19-Jun-2020

13 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

General description form for teaching tools

In order to have a comprehensive general description of the teaching tool, please adhere to this format (fill

in table at the end of the document, using the following instructions):

1. The title.

a. It should be descriptive, brief, and always contain

i. What kind of tool it is (for example, facilitator guide, simulated patient case, etc)

ii. Which audience it is for

iii. Which topic it covers

iv. Which language it is in [in brackets]

b. Example: Simulated patient case on dental patients with high anxiety for dental students

[German]

2. The language of the tool.

a. Describe what language the actual tool you are submitting is in – we welcome tools in all

languages.

b. If the tool is available in other languages, please also indicate this and if possible, submit

examples of the tool in each language available.

c. Example: German (also available in English)

3. For which audience?

a. The audience whom this tool has been used with should be described. We recognize that

some tools are for very specific audiences (for example, 2nd year dental students), while

others might be used with a broad range of health professional learners (for example, bad

news cases for any level of medical learner) This field should contain

i. Information about profession(s) the tool has been used with (medicine, dentistry,

nursing, other)

ii. Information about level(s) of learner the tool has been used with (undergraduate,

postgraduate, other)

Page 2: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

iii. Information about preferred size of audience for use of this tool

b. Example: Cardiologists, nurses. Postgraduate. Small group (<10).

4. The goals and objectives of the tool (operational).

a. First, please list the number(s) of the objectives of the Health Profession Core

Communication Curriculum this tool addresses (also if the tool is for postgraduates)

b. Then provide a description of the goals/objectives of the tool, describing the intended

purpose of the tool in terms of what learners will be able to do after using it.

c. If your tool does not fit the Core Curriculum, please make a note.

d. Example: The tool addresses the Core Curriculum’s objective A6. After this session, learners

will be able to discuss the consequences of lab tests that indicate an HIV infection.

5. The type of tool.

a. The description should be as brief as possible, yet sufficient to cover what it is.

b. Possible examples: Lecture notes in powerpoint format, website, facilitator guide,

comprehensive model, illustrative video, laminated pocket memory card, etc.

6. General short description.

a. Please limit description to 200 words that includes main features of the tool including (if

relevant) more precise description of audience requirements, length of session, etc. Please

include important details (e.g. distribution of time on introduction, activation of prior

knowledge, role plays, reflection, summaries etc, advantages and pitfalls when using the

tool)

b. Example: This is a set of four teaching sessions using small group work with simulated

patients for first year clinical students to practise skills in: basic interviewing, gathering

information, adapting their consultation style in different types of consultation, sharing

information and discussing treatment, and breaking bad news. The packs include

information on the format of the sessions, tutor notes, actor briefing and student handouts.

One pitfall is that first year students often feel helpless because of little medical knowledge.

Page 3: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

You should use sufficient time on the introduction of the first session to inform the students

how to deal with that in these exercises.

7. Practical resources such as materials needed, faculty/facilitator needs, preparation needs, etc.

a. Any information about necessary requirements for the tool needs to be listed here

i. Necessary human resources (how many people does it take to use the tool in terms

of teachers/facilitators, standardized patients (SPs), etc) and capabilities (what

special skills do people using the tool need – for example SPs who can cry)

ii. Necessary facilities and equipment including computers, cameras etc. (Are there any

special room requirements, audiovisual equipment such as data projector, flip chart,

etc)

iii. Necessary software, handouts etc. (Does the tool require specific computer

programs? Please list any handouts that need to be produced)

8. Contact information.

a. Provide the name and email address of the person submitting the tool. This person should

also be the author of the tool. If this is not the case, the authors should be listed and an

explanation for why you are submitting the tool instead of them should be provided.

9. List of tool files.

a. We prefer single, amalgated pdf files that include all material, unless this is not feasible.

b. File names should preferably indicate author_tool type_language_date of submission

(YYMMDD).

c. Example: Gulbrandsen_lecture_note_Norwegian_130530.pdf

We would like to thank you for your contribution! Please follow the progress of our work at www.each.eu

Page 4: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Teaching Tool description

Title Training to Enhance Communication with Patients with Psychosis

(TEMPO) [English]

Language English

Audience This training is relevant for psychiatrists (higher trainee psychiatrists,

Staff and Associate Specialist Psychiatrists and Consultant

Psychiatrists), psychiatric nurses, social workers and other mental

healthcare professionals. It could also be useful for General

Practioners working with patients with psychosis.

Goals/educational objectives

Link with Core curriculum

The aim of TEMPO is twofold: firstly, to reflect on patients’

experience of psychosis and challenges for patients and

professionals communicating about these experiences; and,

secondly to enhance communication with patients with psychosis.

Participants will have an increased awareness of the patient’s

experience, which is the springboard for reflecting on and practising

skills to enhance communication about psychotic experiences.

The training focuses on core communication skills – e.g. exploring

symptoms/ feelings/ expectations, active listening skills and

responding appropriately, agenda setting, involving patients in

decisions – and specific skills for working with positive and negative

symptoms of schizophrenia – e.g. collaborative goal setting for

patients with negative symptoms, cognitive behaviour therapy

techniques for psychotic symptoms, explaining and normalising

symptoms.

Most elements of the training can also be applied to communication

with patients with other mental health problems. After viewing their

own interactions with patients, participants will also be able to

reflect on their own communication and identify areas to work on

with regards to their individual communication style.

NB: This tool does not fit the core curriculum.

Type of tool Facilitator’s manual, power point slides for 4 group sessions, video

clips of real consultation examples, experiential exercise (simulated

hearing voices experience), role-plays in pairs and with actors (with

and without) video-recording, individualised feedback session based

on video-recorded consultations with patients

The facilitator‘s manual consists of three parts: (i) an introduction to

the training development and content (ii) guidance and instructions

on how to run the sessions and use the specific training methods,

and (iii) the teaching material for all sessions

Slides, video clips and supplementary reading are in seperate format

Brief description The TEMPO training is an evidence-based training programme for

mental health professionals that aims to improve communication

with patients with psychosis.

The programme has been developed by experts in the field of

communication, psychosis, medical communication skills,

psychiatrists and service-users. The content is based on research

conducted over 15 years using real video-recorded psychiatric

Page 5: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

consultations. The approach promoted in the training is to develop

core communication skills, which can be applied to issues specific to

psychosis and other areas in psychiatry.

The training consists of four (3 hour) group sessions and one (1.5 to

2.5 hour) individualised feedback session.

The focus of the four group sessions is:

1. Understanding the patient with psychosis

2. Techniques for working with symptoms

3. Empowering the patient

4. Involving the patient in decisions

A range of training methods are combined, including experiential

exercises, video-recorded role-play with simulated patients,

reflecting on examples of real video-recorded psychiatric

consultations and individualised feedback on one’s own routine

consultations with patients.

The training can be adapted to suit the needs of participants.

In a Randomised Controlled Trial, the training has been found to

improve: professional communication in routine consultations;

professional and patient views of the quality of their relationship;

and, treatment satisfaction. Please contact us below if you would

like further details on the trial.

Practical resources The TEMPO training can be delivered in a number of different ways.

It is possible to pick and mix elements of the training and adapt

these according to your course requirements and learners’ needs.

Facilitators:

Ideally, two facilitators should run the sessions. Between them, they

should have an understanding of psychosis and communication. A

combination of a communication skills facilitator and an experienced

psychiatrist who is interested in communication works well. In order

to ensure continuity, at least one facilitator should be the same

across all of the sessions. It is optional to involve more facilitators

who can deliver aspects of the training programme relevant to their

expertise. However, a second co-facilitator is required for session 3

and 4 to run the role-plays in sub-groups.

The minimum equipment needed is:

Overhead projector with screen

Flipcharts and pens

A laptop computer with PowerPoint is needed to access the

material

MP3 players/device with headphones are required for the

hearing voices exercise in session 1

Two video-cameras and usb-connecting cables are required

to film and enable video-feedback for role-plays in session 3

and 4

Optional:

Professional actors for role-plays in session 3 and 4

Page 6: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Video-recording of a consultation between the participant

and a patient for individualised feedback sessions

Contact

(name and email)

Prof Rose McCabe

University of Exeter, Medical School

[email protected]

List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf

Slides session 1.pptx

Slides session 2.pptx

Slides session 3.pptx

Slides session 4.pptx

Hearing-voices-simulation.mp3

Supplementary reading:

Session 1 - McCabe et al. (2008).pdf

Session 1 - McCabe et al. (2002).pdf

Session 2 - Kingdon et al. (2006).pdf

Session 3 - Thomson et al. (2010).pdf

Session 3 - Mitchell et al. (2007).pdf

Session 4 - McCabe et al. (2013).pdf

Session 4 - Torrey et al. (2010).pdf

Video clips:

Session 1 - EAR Skills 1.mp4

Session 1 - EAR Skills 2.mp4

Session 3 - Agenda Setting 1.mp4

Session 3 - Agenda Setting 2.mp4

Session 3 - Explaining Psychosis.mp4

Session 4 – Double-sided reflection.mp4

Session 4 – Options.mp4

Session 4 – Stop meds.mp4

Session 4 – Disagreement Service-user.mp4

Session 4 – Language Service-user.mp4

Session 4 – SDM Service-user.mp4

Page 7: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEMPO – Training to Enhance Communication with Patients with

Psychosis

Session 1

Understanding the patient with psychosis

Page 8: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Individualised feedback

Review and reflect on your communication

Session 4: Shared Decision Making

Involving patients in decisions Negotiation skills

Session 3: Empowering the patient

Agenda Setting Explaining Psychosis

Session 2: Techniques for working with symptoms

Responding to positive symptoms Reframing negative symptoms

Session 1: Understanding the patient with psychosis

Experiencing Psychosis EAR: Explore Listen Actively Respond

Page 9: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx
Page 10: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Challenges

In pairs discuss…

• What issues have you faced when working with patients experiencing psychosis?

• What might the issues be for patients?

Group discussion…

• Feedback to group.

Page 11: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx
Page 12: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Transcript

Mother: Okay three months time Dr: So Patient: Why don’t people believe me doctor

when I say I’m God? Why don’t they believe me, cos everyone knows I am?

Dr: What shall I say now? Mother: ha-ha Dr: Well you are free to believe it but

people are free not to believe you.

Page 13: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Communicating about psychotic experiences

• Avoidance – fear of disagreement

• Patients don’t feel understood

• Patients ‘confront’

• Disagreement between psychiatrist & patient

• Not a good basis for treatment engagement & adherence

• Qualitatively different experience

• Not a good basis for negotiating about treatment

• McCabe et al. (2002) Engagement of patients with psychosis in the consultation:

conversation analytic study, British Medical Journal, 325: 1148-51.

Page 14: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Experiencing psychosis

What do psychotic symptoms feel like?

• Hearing voices simulation exercise

• Feedback experience to group

Page 15: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Break!

Page 16: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

EAR Skills

Patients want to feel heard and understood

• Explore

• Listen Actively

• Respond

Page 17: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

EAR Skills

• Explore What?

Page 18: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore

• Explore:

- Symptoms, Experience, Ideas, Feelings: • How are you in yourself?

• How does it make you feel?

• How do you cope with it when it happens?

• What’s your understanding of that?

• How are things at home?

- Worries, Concerns • What are you worried about?

- Expectations • What were you wanting to talk about today?

Page 19: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore: Open to closed vs. closed questions

Page 20: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore

• Avoid leading questions & presumptions

– Real consultation examples:

• ‘The voices don’t bother you do they?’

• ‘You weren’t suffering from any paranoia?’

• ‘No side-effects at all?’

Page 21: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Listen Actively

• What makes you feel listened to?

• Skills that help the patient to talk Wait:

• Give patient time to think before answering

• Allow patient to complete statements without interruption

Non-verbal behaviour: • posture, gaze, nodding

• Summarize periodically, invite patient to revise Can I check that I have understood? What you have told me is…

So from what you have said …………. Have I got that right?

Page 22: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Respond

• Specific follow-up questions (depends on topic)

• VALIDATION – If patient is expressing or reporting difficulties: Acknowledge

patients’ feelings, concerns BUT not empty empathy (“I understand”, “That must be very difficult”)

• You seem (frustrated, worried, sad)…….

• It sounds like that is very hard/distressing etc……

– If patient is expressing, reporting positives:

Reinforce how the patient manages and positive steps they have taken

• It sounds like you are dealing with it very well…

• I can see you are feeling pleased with how things are…….

Page 23: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

EAR-skills

Page 24: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

EAR-skills

Page 25: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Active Listening Role-play

• In pairs assign psychiatrist and patient role

– Patient presents concern

– Psychiatrist to listen actively using EAR skills

– Psychiatrist to then respond – acknowledge*

• Now swap roles…

• Feedback in group

*NB – do not give advice or explain yet

Page 26: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Skills booklet

• Content:

– Learning points, helpful phrases, action plan

Page 27: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning • Choose 2 of the EAR-skills you think would benefit your practice this week.

1.

2.

How important is it to you to use this in your practice in the next week?

How confident are you that you will use it in your practice in the next week?

Not important at all Extremely important

0 5 10

Not confident at all Extremely confident

0 5 10

Page 28: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEMPO

Session 2

Techniques for working with symptoms

Page 29: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning - recap

• What 2 skills did you try?

• What success did you enjoy?

• What challenges arose?

Page 30: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Individualised feedback

Review and reflect on your communication

Session 4: Shared Decision Making

Involving patients in decisions Negotiation skills

Session 3: Empowering the patient

Agenda Setting Explaining Psychosis

Session 2: Techniques for working with symptoms

Responding to positive symptoms Reframing negative symptoms

Session 1: Understanding the patient with psychosis

Experiencing Psychosis EAR: Explore Listen Actively Respond

Page 31: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Introduction

• CBT is effective for treatment of psychosis

• CBT session: 50 minutes over the course of multiple weeks but psychiatrists only have approx. 15 minutes

• However, some of the techniques are still very useful in psychiatric practice

• Work with patients along side other mental health professionals

Page 32: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Introduction

• What is the function of an outpatient psychiatric consultation?

Page 33: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Introduction

Essential tasks in any consultation:

• Engagement

• Assessment

• Formulation

Page 34: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Facilitating patient engagement

• Work on building up a therapeutic relationship

• Therapeutic relationship Engagement Adherence

• Develop therapeutic relationship: – Show that you’re interested – in a non-critical way

– Not about right or wrong

– Patient to feel listened to

• You’re the expert but patient is expert in their own life – work alongside each other and show understanding and

respect

Page 35: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Positive symptoms: Working with strong beliefs

• How do you feel about discussing strong beliefs with your patients?

• How do you talk to the patient about it?

Page 36: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

How to talk about strong beliefs

• Previous research shows: patients are talking about something really important to them and psychiatrist responds with e.g. are you taking your meds?

Psychiatrists tend to avoid the discussion because it may lead to disagreement

• Focus on listening, understanding, exploring, i.e. working on the relationship!

Page 37: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore strong beliefs

• Initial assessment (History of Presenting Complaint)

– trace origins of belief: ‘listen to their story’

– build a picture of prodromal period

• identify significant life events & circumstances

• identify relevant perceptions & thoughts

– explore content of belief

Page 38: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore patient’s story

• Draw out the person’s story surrounding the belief – 3 objectives:

• You know the story • Patients knows you know the story • Patient understands the story and begins to process it

– Process over course of 2 or 3 sessions – Go back to why they came to conclusions (belief) and what

reinforced it – Exploring and listening to story helps building up rapport

and patient engagement

Page 39: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Helpful phrases What was

happening at the time? When did it

start?

What made you believe this at the

time?

I’d like to understand why

you believe this…

It’s given me some understanding of

how you’ve become concerned

Page 40: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Tips

• Get across that you’re interested. Not to demonstrate they’re wrong. Not in a critical way, in an exploratory way. – I’d like to understand why you believe this….I’m really

interested.

– Can you keep going with the story? It’s giving me some understanding of how you’ve become concerned.

• If patient is becoming distressed, step back – We can leave this for now, and come back to it.

Page 41: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Debate strong beliefs

• Establish nature of evidence for the belief – discuss significant others’ opinions

• Why do you think others think that..

– elicit alternatives: prompt only if necessary

• If someone said that to you, how would you respond?

• What about...? do you think just possibly..?

• Explore doubts about belief: even the tiniest wink of doubt is extremely helpful in the future

– exploration/investigation

• Simple tasks – find information or test out (e.g. use audio-recorder to test if voices are really there)

Page 42: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Opening and closing session

• Opening session:

– trace origins & prodrome – sometimes this is only in notes!

– explore current concerns

– empathise/discuss

• Terminating sessions

– agree to continue discussion – next time

– agree to set up opportunity for further discussions

– It’s been very helpful to discuss this and we will continue our discussion

Page 43: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

How do you respond…

• When the patient asks: ‘You don’t believe me –do you?’

Page 44: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

How do you respond…

• Suggested responses: – Whether I believe you or not, it’s important to talk about

this. What you’ve told me at the moment, I’m not fully convinced. I think we need to talk about this more. I think I can see how you came to believe this. Is there anything you can do over the next few months that would help us in this discussion?

– Can we set this aside for the moment and go back a bit to help me understand?

Page 45: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Positive symptoms: EAR skills EAR-skills Responding to positive symptoms:

strong beliefs

Explore Explore: patient’s story of belief and individuality of perception & origin Discuss phenomena

Listen Actively

Show understanding & interest Check understanding

Respond

Normalize most people… Debate coping

Page 46: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Delusions Role-play

• In pairs assign psychiatrist and patient role

– Patient describes current concern

– Psychiatrist draws out their story using prompts and questions

• by exploring how strong beliefs began

• how they have developed

• how they affect them now

– Agree a way forward

• Now swap roles…

Page 47: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Break

Page 48: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Working with voices

• Goal:

– Patient understand that you understand they are hearing voices

– Ideally, the long-term aim is to develop patient awareness that voices may be something to do with them. This is key for interventions, medication, coping strategies, which are not relevant if nothing to do with them.

Page 49: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore voices

• Discuss the experience:

What is it like? Someone speaking to you like I’m doing now.. maybe louder or whispered

• Explore individuality of perception

Can anybody else hear what is said?’ ‘not parents, friends, etc?

• Discover beliefs about origin:

Why do you think others can’t they hear them?

• Debate individual beliefs about origin of voices

• ‘But that’s the way God is..’; use techniques for delusions, if appropriate

• explore doubts: ‘I’m not sure how they come..’

Page 50: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Debate voices

• Weigh pros & cons of what voices say: ‘you’re bad’ – Why do you think they’re saying that? Is there any truth to that? Do

you think you’re that bad? What is it that’s bad? What are the good things about you?

– Important for patient to draw conclusion, they’re ok

• Normalising explanations: – Sleep deprivation and other stressful circumstances: e.g.

bereavement, hostages, PTSD, ‘inner speech’, dreaming

– Understand hallucinations – mind hears things, not coming through the ears, but coming from your mind, voice area in brain active (broca’s area).

Page 51: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Purpose of this approach

• Help patient understand the voices

• Clarify voices between you and patient shared understanding of voices

• Help patient recognise: Not the voices are the problem – but what they’re doing to you

Page 52: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Voices Role-play

• In pairs assign psychiatrist and patient role.

– Patient describes voices

– Psychiatrist

• explores beliefs about voices

– Agree a way forward

• Now swap roles…

Page 53: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Working with negative symptoms

• How do you recognise patient with negative symptoms?

– Through conversation

• Key negative symptoms: lack of communication & motivation

Page 54: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

How to deal with amotivation

• Help patient get back into life step by step

• Build up resilience & empowerment! – You can’t push patients out off negative symptoms - the more

pressure, the worse it gets!!

– Broken leg analogy: psychological healing period required

– ‘Relax – take some time off!’

– When patient feels ready, help getting him/her back in to life – step by step

– Help them get back in control again!

Page 55: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Realistic and graduated goal setting

• Small steps, e.g. ‘Get up twice a day to make yourself a cup of tea’- what would it be like to go out? try it out!

• Have a plan to do things gradually the earlier psychiatrists can do this work the better

• Set a short-term goal (What did you used to do that you might like to do?)

• Set a long-term goal (3-5 years)

• All goals have to come from the patient!

Page 56: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SMART goals

• Collaboratively select initial goal (SMART):

– Specific

– Measurable

– Achievable

– Realistic

– Timely

Page 57: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Negative symptoms

• Re-conceptualise negative symptoms:

– As protective against stress and positive symptoms

Page 58: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Negative symptoms: EAR skills EAR-skills Reframing negative symptoms

Explore Explore short & long term goals

Listen Actively

Summarize periodically

Respond

Take the pressure off Collaboratively set SMART goals

Page 59: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Negative symptoms Role-play

• Describe rationale

– Protective nature of negative symptoms

– Aim for patient to feel better able to cope, in control and not under pressure

• Set a long-term goal (3-5 years)

• Collaboratively select initial goal (SMART)

Page 60: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Skills booklet

• Content:

– Learning points, helpful phrases, action plan, EAR-table

Page 61: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning

• Choose two of the specific skills for symptoms you think would benefit your practice this week.

1.

2. How important is it to you to use this in your practice in the next week?

How confident are you that you will use it in your practice in the next week?

Not important at all Extremely important

0 5 10

Not confident at all Extremely confident

0 5 10

Page 62: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEMPO

Session 3

Empowering the patient

Page 63: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning - recap

• What 2 skills did you try?

• What success did you enjoy?

• What challenges arose?

Page 64: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Individualised feedback

Review and reflect on your communication

Session 4: Shared Decision Making

Involving patients in decisions Negotiation skills

Session 3: Empowering the patient

Agenda Setting Explaining Psychosis

Session 2: Techniques for working with symptoms

Responding to positive symptoms Reframing negative symptoms

Session 1: Understanding the patient with psychosis

Experiencing Psychosis EAR: Explore Listen Actively Respond

Page 65: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Patient & psychiatrist priorities: Shortlist Patients Psychiatrists

Community Mental Health Services Management plan

Treatment/Medication/Psychological interventions

Mental state examination

Personal / relationship issues Risk assessment

Autonomy & self-determination Two way communication

Social support

Therapeutic interventions

To address what the patient wants

Page 66: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

External context

• What are the external pressures?

• Your own agenda?

Page 67: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Agenda Setting - Steps

1. Patient’s priorities.

2. Own priorities.

3. Negotiate.

4. Signpost & Recap.

Page 68: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Eliciting patient’s priorities

• Early in the meeting, not when getting ready to wrap up

When you were on your way here today, what were you thinking that you’d like to happen in our meeting today?

Page 69: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Elicit patient’s priorities

Page 70: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Elicit patient’s priorities

Page 71: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 1 – Elicit the patient’s priorities

– ANY vs SOME

– Recap on the concern raised, and then ask “is there something else you would like us to address today?

– New vs. follow-up patients

– With new: “What is your understanding of seeing me today?” “Before you came, what were your expectations?”

When you were on your way here today did you have some things in mind that you wanted to talk about?

Page 72: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 2 – Explain your own priorities

– I also have some things that I would like for us to discuss including…

– We have the time to discuss our highest priorities, let’s focus on these and try to answer some of your questions.

Page 73: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 3 - Negotiate

• Make shared and explicit decisions about time.

• Where priorities differ:

– Articulate patient & own agenda items

– If too many items, agree on most important for today

We have the time to discuss our highest priorities, let’s focus on these and try to answer some of your questions.

Page 74: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 4 - Recap Recap and summarise the plan

• Your patient will remember this better than early parts of session

• Empathy • Genuinely trying to move things forward • End on a positive note (Things might seem

difficult at the moment but they will get better)

Today we have discussed… and agreed… (In our next consultation we will come back to some of these issues).

Page 75: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Agenda setting: EAR skills Agenda setting

Explore • Explore patient’s priorities for the session • Check you have understood their priorities

Listen Actively

• Reflect patient’s language • Summarize periodically • So what’s concerning you at the moment is..

Respond

•Acknowledge effect of patient’s concerns •Explain your own priorities • Recap

Page 76: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Agenda setting Role-play

• STEP 1: Eliciting patient’s priorities

Page 77: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Break!

Page 78: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explaining psychosis

• How to explain psychosis to patients?

• Questions patients ask about their experiences/ illness

Page 79: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Questions about psychosis

Page 80: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

How do you respond…

• Why am I paranoid?

• Why now?

Page 81: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Other egs of patient questions

• ‘Do you think my mind is unbalanced?’

• ‘Is my schizophrenia learnt from my family or is it genetic?’

• ‘What is it, an illness? I just don’t know? Is it my personality?’

• ‘Do they exist - people who are causing this sickness?’

Page 82: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explaining psychosis

• What does the patient ask?

• Listen for patients’ prompts – signals from patients that their concerns have not

been explored, e.g. ‘my girlfriend has been very worried about me’, ‘I just don’t understand’

– restating a problem

• What is the subtext - what are they really worried about?

• If relevant, ask patients if they want to know more about….

Page 83: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Useful tips

• Be aware of tendency to avoid these questions

• Don’t overload on information – get a balance between ‘informing’ and attending to the patient’s concern

• Have a model to work with for explaining psychosis – don’t pass it on. i.e. ‘The psychologist or your nurse will talk about that’.

• Clarify what the patient means (e.g. Why am I paranoid?). What does the patient mean by paranoid?

Page 84: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Psychosis • ‘Psychosis’ relates to experiences, such as hearing or seeing

things or holding unusual beliefs, which other people don’t experience or share.

• Psychotic experiences can be just like ‘waking dreams’, where strange things happen and our perceptions are altered. Like dreams, they feel real and intense.

• Schizophrenia used to mean XXX. We know now that…prognosis

You have an illness (select depending on what the patient is asking). It is not uncommon for people to have experiences like the ones you’ve described. Our brains can easily become paranoid (or depressed or …).

Page 85: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Causes

• While we don’t know exactly what causes schizophrenia, it seems to be a combination of the genes we inherit, how our brain works and stress.

Page 86: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Voices

• Hearing voices when nobody is around or at least when nobody seems to be saying the words you hear is part of your illness.

• Causes: Very stressful circumstances ( bereavement, hostage), sleep deprivation, drugs, mental illness

•1 in 20 people hear voices at some point in their lives. •Many famous, very successful people hear voices – the actor Anthony Hopkins, the musician Brian Wilson from the Beach Boys.

Page 87: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Feeling suspicious

• Suspicious thoughts about others are described as paranoid when they are exaggerated and interfere with your day to day life

– A central part is a sense of threat

• Jumping to conclusions

• Self-reference

• People in a vulnerable state of mind: Major life events, feeling isolated, anxiety and depression, poor sleep, drugs, physical causes (e.g. dementia)

Many people have suspicious thoughts or worries about others from time to time.

Page 88: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Thought disorder

• Happens when your thoughts get muddled and jumbled up.

Page 89: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Prognosis

• Many people with schizophrenia never have to go into hospital and are able to settle down, work and have lasting relationships. If we consider 5 people with schizophrenia, 1 will get better within five years of their first obvious symptoms and don’t experience any further psychotic symptoms; 3 will get better, but will have times when they get worse again; and 1 will have troublesome symptoms for longer periods of time.

• Most people (with schizophrenia) have a good outcome over time/ lead good lives with the effective treatments that are available

Page 90: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explaining psychosis: EAR-skills

Explaining Psychosis

Explore • Explore patient’s understanding of illness/psychosis • Explore patient’s need for information

Listen Actively

• Listen for patient’s prompts • Nonverbal feedback • Echo – reflect back what patient has said

Respond

• Acknowledge patient’s concerns about psychosis • Normalise experiences

Page 91: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explaining Psychosis Role-play

• Explain psychosis to patient and normalise!

Page 92: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Information & Peer Support

• Patient information materials:

– Royal College for psychiatrists

– Mind

– Rethink

– Scottish recovery net

– My name is Pete comic

• Florid - service user organization in ELFT

• Hearing Voices Groups

Page 93: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Patient material online

• http://www.scottishrecovery.net/

• http://www.rcpsych.ac.uk/mentalhealthinfoforall/problems/schizophrenia/schizophrenia.aspx

• http://www.rethink.org/about_mental_illness/peoples_experiences/your_experiences/index.html

• http://www.mind.org.uk/help

Page 94: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Skills booklet

• Content:

– Learning points, helpful phrases, action plan, EAR-table

Page 95: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning

• Choose two of the agenda-setting and explaining skills you think would benefit your practice this week.

1.

2. How important is it to you to use this in your practice in the next week?

How confident are you that you will use it in your practice in the next week?

Not important at all Extremely important

0 5 10

Not confident at all Extremely confident

0 5 10

Page 96: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEMPO

Session 4

Shared Decision Making (SDM)

Page 97: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning - recap

• What 2 skills did you try?

• What success did you enjoy?

• What challenges arose?

Page 98: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Individualised feedback

Review and reflect on your communication

Session 4: Shared Decision Making

Involving patients in decisions Negotiation skills

Session 3: Empowering the patient

Agenda Setting Explaining Psychosis

Session 2: Techniques for working with symptoms

Responding to positive symptoms Reframing negative symptoms

Session 1: Understanding the patient with psychosis

Experiencing Psychosis EAR: Explore Listen Actively Respond

Page 99: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Time spent on medication decisions: 2 minutes

Frequency of decisions by topic type (n=128)

59

11

11

9

7

7

6

5

4

3

2

2

2

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

Medication

Community groups

Access to psychology

Other

Physical health referrals

Emergency contact

Drugs & Alcohol Intake

Contact GP

Housing & benefits

Blood tests

Life stressors

Social support/networks

Consent to share informationD

ecis

ion

to

pic

typ

e

Frequency

Page 100: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Medication decisions • Continue with same medication (26%)

• Reduce (19%)

• Increase (18%)

• Add a further medication (16%)

• Stop or change medication (<10%)

McCabe et al. (2013) Shared decision-making in ongoing outpatient psychiatric treatment. Patient Education and Counseling.

Page 101: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

ALL PATIENTS: Medication

1/3 patients do not take advice 1/3 get it wrong 1/3 adhere to recommendations in general health (Pendleton, 1997)

Page 102: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Service-user perspective

Page 103: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Service-user perspective

Page 104: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Shared Decision Making GUNS

1. Give Overview of Options

2. Check Understanding, concerns & preference

1. Negotiate

2. Summarise decision

Page 105: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 1 – Give Overview of Options

• Give overview of all treatment options, including the option of “no action”

• Allows the patient to get an overview before decision is made

• Explain the pros and cons of options

• People cannot be expected to share in decisions if they are not properly informed

One option could be that xxx, the other would be xx XX does still have the same side-effects as other medication, so we’d have to weigh that in a balance against the potential improvements.

Page 106: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

For discussion

• What options do you present to patients?

• What information should be presented to patient to give overview and make an informed decision?

• If you were in the situation, what information would you want?

Page 107: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Give overview of options

Page 108: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 2 – Check understanding, concerns & preference

– Preferred level of involvement?

– Explore patient’s expectations of how problem might be managed

– Check P’s understanding of options (differs in new vs. ongoing patients)

– Ask P if s/he has concerns

– Offer opportunity to ask questions

What do you think about these options? Did you have some ideas about what you wanted to do with your medication? Have you read anything about it?

Page 109: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Giving overview Role-play

• SDM step 1: Give an overview of treatment options

• SDM step 2: Check understanding, concerns and preference

Page 110: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Break!

Page 111: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Patient request for discontinuation

Page 112: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Discussing medication

• What are the pros and cons of coming off medication?

Page 113: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Shared Decision Making GUNS

1. Give Overview of Options

2. Check Understanding, concerns & preference

1. Negotiate

2. Summarise decision

Page 114: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 3 - Negotiate

• Negotiate a treatment option

– Exchange views about options

– Work with the patient’s concerns

– Make explicit both preferences & reasons for each

What do you think? How do you feel about this?

Page 115: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Force might appear to win initially but at what cost?

Meeting resistance with force creates more resistance

Page 116: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

How to react to resistance

• Think about being in a discussion (or argument) where you disagree with someone (e.g. in work)

• In case of different views and disagreement – step back!

• By stepping back, and being less forceful, the other person is more likely to modify position

Page 117: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

STRATEGY 1: Allow disagreement

• Give permission to disagree and tell you negative things that the patient thinks you don’t want to hear

• This helps the patient to feel respected

I know some of my patients sometimes don’t take their medication. I wonder how you feel about this….?

Page 118: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Service-user perspective

Page 119: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

STRATEGY 2: Don’t do a ‘hard sell’

• Don’t ‘sell’ by pushing all the advantages & glossing/ ignoring disadvantages

• Don’t minimize side effects – ‘No problems with the medication?’

– ‘The side effects aren’t intolerable, are they?’

• Positive sign if patient trusts you enough to be negative

What do you see as the downsides?

Page 120: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

STRATEGY 3: Reflect both sides

• Double-sided Reflection

– Reflect specific pros & cons

– E.g., Reflect both a current statement and a previous contradictory statement at the same time

We’re in a bit of a dilemma here aren’t we: on the one hand you feel that xx, and on the other hand xx

Page 121: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Double sided reflection

Page 122: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Difficult to agree on decision

– Contract setting

– We both feel differently about this. On the one hand I can see you are concerned about x. On the other hand I am concerned about x so perhaps we could agree to try… and reassess how we both feel at the next appointment?

– Sharing responsibility, Positive risk taking

– Lets recap. You would like to …. For x reasons I would be concerned and recommend that you….Do you see a way we can reach a compromise?

Page 123: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Difficult to agree on decision

– Open disclosure

– I don’t feel comfortable in this…

– Agree to differ in opinion to leave the doors open for future discussion

– It’s very helpful that we’ve had this discussion although we see things differently.

Page 124: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step 4 – Summarize & review

• Clarify the decision made

• Arrange a review of decision

• Decision can involve deferring or accepting that time is required for further information to be obtained & to reflect

• If no decision reached, decide on next steps

Perhaps you want to think about it a bit more? Do you want to think about it then? Then you’ll just let me know next time. We could talk about it again at your next appointment?

Page 125: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SDM: EAR skills

Shared Decision Making

Explore • Explore preference, understanding & concern regarding treatment & options • Explore patient’s expectations of how problem might be managed •Explore patient’s view

Listen Actively

•Reflect back patient’s statements •Check patient's understanding of options

Respond

• Show support by working with patient’s concerns • Explain treatment options • Step back and be less forceful • Double sided reflection • Agree to differ •Reach compromise & review decision

Page 126: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Negotiation Role-play

• SDM step 3: Negotiation

• SDM step 4: Review decision

Page 127: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx
Page 128: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Feedback on training programme

Page 129: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Training questionnaire

• Complete the post-training self-assessment questionnaire

• Fill in the final action setting form and consider barriers to implementation.

• Arrange individualised feedback session

Page 130: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Final skills booklet

• Content:

– Learning points, helpful phrases, action plan, EAR-table

–Dates for individualized feedback session?

Page 131: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Action planning

• Choose two of skills you think would benefit your practice this week.

1.

2. How important is it to you to use this in your practice in the next week?

How confident are you that you will use it in your practice in the next week?

Not important at all Extremely important

0 5 10

Not confident at all Extremely confident

0 5 10

Page 132: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

The End!

Page 133: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TRAINING TO ENHANCE COMMUNICATION WITH

PATIENTS WITH PSYCHOSIS

TEMPO

A Communication Skills Training Programme for

Mental Health Professionals

MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

EDITED BY ROSE MCCABE

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 1

Page 134: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Copyright © East London NHS Foundation Trust

Developed with funding from the National Institute of Health Research, Research

for Patient Benefit Programme.

This facilitator’s manual book accompanies a DVD.

PROJECT TEAM

Prof Rose McCabe, University of Exeter Medical School

Paula John, Project manager, Queen Mary University of London

Jemima Dooley, Research Assistant, Queen Mary University of London

Prof Annie Cushing, Professor of Clinical Communication Skills, Queen Mary University

of London

Dr Peter Byrne, Consultant Psychiatrist, East London NHS Foundation Trust

Prof David Kingdon, Professor of Mental Health Care Delivery, University of Southampton

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS

We would like to thank: Lou Pembroke, Ann Steele

‘This facilitators’ manual presents independent research funded by the National Institute

for Health Research (NIHR) under its Research for Patient Benefit (RfPB) Programme

(Grant Reference Number PB-PG-0408-16279). The views expressed are those of the

authors and not necessarily those of the NHS, the NIHR or the Department of Health.’

PAGE 2 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 135: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Summary 1

INTRODUCTION 3

Background 5

What is unique about ‘TEMPO’? 7

Training development 8

Training programme 9

Training model and approach 9

Training methods 10

Training content 12

GUIDANCE FOR FACILITATORS 23

Guidance on using the manual 25

Using the TEMPO facilitator’s manual’ 25

Using the TEMPO DVD-ROM 25

Learning materials 25

Guidance on facilitating the training 26

Facilitators 26

Practicalities 26

Timing 26

Group size 26

Accommodation 27

Equipment 27

Running group sessions: creating a supportive learning environment 27

Using the training methods 28

References 34

SESSION 1: UNDERSTANDING THE PATIENT WITH PSYCHOSIS 37

SESSION 2: TECHNIQUES FOR WORKING WITH SYMPTOMS 55

SESSION 3: EMPOWERING THE PATIENT 73

SESSION 4: SHARED DECISION MAKING 104

INDIVIDUALISED FEEDBACK SESSION 147

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 136: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 4 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 137: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SUMMARY

This manual is for facilitators delivering the ‘TEMPO’ training

programme. The aim of the training is twofold: firstly, to reflect

on patients’ experience of psychosis and the challenges in

communicating with these patients, and secondly, to enhance

communication with patients with psychosis. The training consists

of four group sessions lasting three hours each and one further

‘individualised feedback’ session. The sessions should be run by one

or more facilitators with a general understanding of communication

and patients with psychosis. If there are two facilitators, it is sufficient

for one to have a background in communication and one to have

an understanding of clinical practice and psychosis. This manual

consists of three parts: (i) an introduction to the training development

and content (ii) guidance and instructions for facilitators on how to

run the sessions and use the specific training methods, and (iii) the

teaching material for all sessions. The accompanying DVD provides

electronic copies of all the material covered in this training along with

video-clips to be used in the sessions.

The training programme has been developed by experts in the field of

communication, psychosis, medical communication skills, psychiatrists

and service users. The content is largely based on research conducted

over 15 years using real video-recorded psychiatric consultations. The

approach promoted is intended to develop core communication skills,

which can be applied to issues specific to psychiatry and psychosis.

Multiple training methods are combined, including experiential

exercises, video-recorded role-play with simulated patients,

working with examples of real video-recorded psychiatric

consultations and individualised feedback on one’s own routine

consultations with patients.

“I learned useful

approaches and

insights into my

abilities, both strength

and weaknesses, as

a psychiatrist.”

– Staff and Associate

Grade Psychiatrist

“I have found the

training very useful.

It has allowed me

to strike a balance

between my own

priorities as a clinician

and patient priorities.

It has improved my

listening skills and my

skills of motivating

patients with negative

symptoms using the

SMART approach.

Overall, I have learnt to

use less jargon and be a

better communicator.”

– ST4-6 Trainee

Psychiatrist

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 1

Page 138: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 2 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 139: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

INTRODUCTION

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 3

Page 140: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 4 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 141: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Psychiatrists need to

communicate with

patients with psychosis

to ensure patient

engagement and to

treat them effectively

... beyond training in

generic communication

skills, psychiatrists

currently receive no

specific training in how

to communicate with

people with psychotic

illness.

“It’s sometimes

difficult to talk about

symptoms without

colluding – so do you

go with it or do you

challenge the belief?”

– Staff and Associate

Grade Psychiatrist

BACKGROUND

COMMUNICATING WITH PATIENTS WITH PSYCHOSIS:

Mental illness is expressed, diagnosed and treated in social

interaction. However, currently, despite the fact that mental

illness is manifested in and affects communication, mental health

professionals receive little training to address these specific challenges.

Communicating with patients with psychosis can be challenging and

it is often difficult to reach a shared understanding of the patient’s

experiences. Analysis of psychiatrist-patient communication has

shown that, in order to avoid disagreement, psychiatrists tend to

avoid talking about patient’s psychotic experiences (McCabe 2002),

despite the fact that they are often the patient’s primary concern.

However, avoiding their concerns tends to lead to them resurfacing

in a more problematic way (e.g. “Why don’t people believe me…?”

“What do you think….?”). When the patient’s concerns resurface in

this way, they lead to disagreement about the patient’s experiences.

This lack of a shared understanding of the problem, and worse,

disagreement about the problem, is not a good basis for engaging

patients in treatment.

Meanwhile, patients with psychosis report being dissatisfied with

aspects of their treatment, including communication (Pinfold & Corry

2003). This dissatisfaction can result in a diminished therapeutic

relationship between patient and psychiatrist, which makes the

patient less likely to adhere to treatment, thus impacting negatively

on long-term patient outcomes (McCabe & Priebe 2004).

Hence, psychiatrists need to communicate well with patients with

psychosis in order to ensure patient engagement and effective

treatment. However, beyond training in generic communication

skills, psychiatrists currently receive no specific training in how to

communicate with patients with psychotic illness.

This project has emerged in response to calls from within the

psychiatric profession to define and integrate such specific skills in

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 5

Page 142: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

psychiatric practice (Bhugra 2008), and from 15 years of research into communication

about psychosis. A large database of video-recorded psychiatric consultations provided

a unique source to identify challenges in communication in ‘the real world’ and

sophisticated ways of addressing these challenges within the constraints of busy

day-to-day clinical practice. Micro-analysis of psychiatrist-patient communication in these

recordings informed both the training content and material, e.g. role-play scenarios and

‘real consultation video clips’.

This is the first training internationally to target specific communication skills for

psychiatrists treating patients with psychosis.

GENERIC COMMUNICATION SKILLS:

While this training programme has been designed primarily for communication with

patients with psychosis, the training also encompasses generic communication skills

in psychiatric practice, such as shared decision making and dealing with disagreement,

which are relevant in communication with people with a range of mental health disorders.

Although the training was developed with and for psychiatrists, much of the training

could also be used for training other mental health professionals working in:

— Community mental health teams

— Assertive outreach teams

— Early intervention teams

— Other specialist teams or teams within an in-patient setting.

PAGE 6 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 143: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

WHAT IS UNIQUE ABOUT THE ‘TEMPO’ TRAINING?

The training incorporates a variety of novel approaches and methods:

Most importantly, it is based on video data of real psychiatric consultations, which:

— Informs the training content, for example:

• Psychiatrists’ reluctance to discuss psychotic symptoms

• Communication practices that invite patient participation in decision

making around medication (e.g. ‘I’m going to increase your medication’ vs.

‘From what you are telling me, you are feeling more suspicious recently and

one option might be to increase your medication, what would you think

about that?’)

• A tendency to ask the patient if there is anything else they would like to

talk about at the end of the consultation (‘Anything else you would like to

discuss?’) while wrapping up rather than at the beginning (‘Are there some

things you would like to discuss today?’).

— Informs the training material:

• All role-play scenarios are taken from transcripts of real conversations

between psychiatrists and patients

• Actors for role-plays are briefed using material from consultation videos

• Video clips are used to demonstrate how psychiatrists actually communicate

and how particular ways of communicating lead to particular patient responses

• Role-play uses professional actors and immediate video-feedback

• An innovative ‘hearing voices exercise’ is conducted to increase empathy

towards patients experience of psychosis

• Expert facilitators, including clinicians as well as communication and psychosis

experts deliver aspects of the training according to their expertise

• Participants are offered individualised feedback from expert facilitators and

the opportunity to review and reflect on their own communication using

video-recordings of their own routine consultations with patients

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 7

Page 144: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TRAINING DEVELOPMENT

In order to develop the training, primary and secondary research was conducted, existing

research evidence was identified and experts were consulted on the content and most

effective methods of communication skills training:

Further details of these steps can be obtained from the authors.

Analysis of video-recorded psychiatric outpatient

consultations

Identifying evidence for the effectiveness of

training methods

Service user interviews

Systematic review on communication with

patients with psychosis

Pilot sessions with psychiatrists

Focus groups with trainee psychiatrists

RESEARCH EXPERT CONSULATION

Reviewing existing approaches to psychosis in consultation with experts

Studying other existing Communication Skills

programmes

Reviewing and analysing service-user material

PAGE 8 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 145: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TRAINING PROGRAMME

TRAINING MODEL AND APPROACH

The training is based on a combined skills and attitude model with emphasis on peer

discussion and support.

APPROACH: EAR-SKILLS

The approach promoted in the training programme is to develop core communication skills, in particular exploring, active listening and responding skills that are adapted to the

content areas covered in the training.

The core communication skills are summed up in the acronym ‘EAR’: ‘Explore’, ‘Listen Actively’ and ‘Respond’. The content areas are relevant to psychiatry more widely,

with the exception of the material on positive and negative symptoms. For each session,

examples are provided in the ‘EAR-table’ of how the EAR-skills are applied to the five

content areas: positive symptoms, negative symptoms, agenda setting, explaining illness

and shared decision-making.

ATTITUDES

• Awareness of evidence that communication influences outcome in psychosis

• Experiential voice hearing exercise to develop a better understanding of patients’ experiences

SKILLS/ BEHAVIOUR

• Behavioural change is facilitated by developing and rehearsing specific communication skills using methods such as role-playing and action-setting to transfer skills into practice

PEER SUPPORT AND DISCUSSION

• Group discussions and feedback allow psychiatrists to share challenges, discuss positive aspects of and difficulties implementing new ways of communicating. They learn from each other’s experiences

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 9

Page 146: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TRAINING METHODS

The proposed methods are based on evidence of optimal communication skills acquisition

(Roter 2006, Gask 1998, Jenkins 2002, Maguire & Pitceathly 2002). A range of different

training methods will ensure that different learning styles are accommodated.

TRAINING METHOD DESCRIPTION RATIONALE

Didactic teaching Theoretical background & evidence base

Building on knowledge facilitates changes in attitudes & behaviour

Working with ‘real consultation examples’

• Video clips showing challenges & positive skills

• Basis for role plays

• Real consultations recommended over simulated consultations (Maguire 2002)

• Basing the intervention on real consultations allows discussions about the difficulties and consequences of using different techniques within the constraints of clinical practice (Pomerantz 2005)

• Video clips introduce the skills topic (Gask 1998)

Role-play Two different role-play methods are used

Behavioural change achieved by rehearsing new skills in a supportive environment & further learning takes places in responding to constructive feedback

Role-play with simulated patient & video feedback:

Participants practise the skills in role-play with skilled actors simulating patients with psychosis

Role-play is video-recorded, played back (particular moments can be identified) and feedback given on the basis of the video

• Simulated patients provide intensive feedback both in and out of role (Whitehouse 1984)

• Videotape feedback highly effective in helping psychiatrists (Maguire 1984; Harrison 1993) acquire interpersonal skills & appreciate the importance of non-verbal communication

• Combination of simulated patients and video-feedback provides ‘powerful and effective teaching tool providing guidance for experiential learning and reflective self-assessment ‘(Gask 1998)

PAGE 10 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 147: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TRAINING METHOD DESCRIPTION RATIONALE

Role-play Paired role-play:

Participants take it in turns to play the psychiatrist (practising the newly acquired skills) and the patient

Creating the space to ‘put myself in the patient’s shoes’ can increase understanding and empathy

Experiential exercise ‘Hearing distressing voices simulation’ (Deegan 1996): psychiatrists listen to simulated distressing voices while performing cognitive and socially engaging tasks

• Hearing voices is qualitatively different experience → this exercise bridges this gap

• Aim: to increase understanding and empathy toward the lived experience of psychotic symptoms to facilitate change in attitude and behaviour

Group discussion Group discussions used in every session to discuss specific issues, e.g. challenges, how to respond to patients, how to implement the skills

• Group discussion ‘powerful medium for sharing and learning from each other’s experiences, exploring diverse points of view and generating ideas to both challenge and affirm’ (Kai 2005)

• Further utilized to discuss positive aspects of training and difficulties encountered in implementing new skills

Action setting and feedback

Particular skills to be put into practice the following week are identified at end of each session

Action setting = effective tool to translate skills into practice outside training setting

Individualised feedback Psychiatrists review their own video-recorded consultations in supervision with expert facilitator

• Psychiatrists identify how skills from the ‘classroom’ can be applied to specific patients and presenting issues

• Typically, some skills are more applicable than others and a maximum of three are selected for using in the next consultation with this patient

• Viewing not more than 2 consultations in one sitting is advised

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 11

Page 148: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TRAINING CONTENT

The training programme consists of four group sessions and one ‘individualised feedback’

session. The following gives a brief overview of the aims and methods of the sessions as

well as some additional information on theoretical background and principles.

Components that are specific to psychosis are highlighted in red, and components applicable to general psychiatry are highlighted in green.

OVERVIEW OF THE FIVE SESSIONS

INDIVIDUALISED FEEDBACK SESSION

Watch and reflect on video recorded consultation(s)

SESSION 4: SHARED DECISION MAKING

Involving patients in decisions Negotiation skills

SESSION 3: EMPOWERING THE PATIENT

Agenda Setting Explaining Psychosis/illness

SESSION 2: TECHNIQUES FOR WORKING WITH SYMPTOMS

Responding to positive symptoms Reframing negative symptoms

SESSION 1: UNDERSTANDING THE PATIENT WITH PSYCHOSIS & COMMUNICATION

Psychosis: Challenges & Experience EAR: Explore Listen Actively Respond

PAGE 12 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 149: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 1: UNDERSTANDING THE PATIENT WITH PSYCHOSIS

AIMS AND METHODS

1. To develop empathy for the patient’s experience of psychosis and to target a change in attitude by:

— Discussing the challenges psychiatrists face when

communicating with patients with psychosis and vice versa

— Reviewing the evidence on why it is important to discuss

psychotic symptoms

— Participating in an experiential ‘hearing voices exercise’

2. To develop core communication skills (EAR-skills) that can be applied to the content areas by:

— Learning EAR-skills (Explore, Listen Actively, Respond)

— Watching real consultation examples to identify and discuss

use of EAR-skills

— Practising active listening in paired role-play

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:

Basic communication skills are at the heart of good communication

and influence the patient’s experience. These core communication

skills (EAR-skills) can then be applied to all (content) areas covered in

the programme.

Exploring: Psychiatrists need to explore the patient’s symptoms,

experiences, ideas, feelings, worries, concerns and expectations

(Magiure 2002). The Calgary – Cambridge Guide to the Medical

Interview (Kurtz 1996) highlights the importance of using concise and

easily understood language, and starting with open ended questions,

before moving to closed questions.

“The ‘hearing voices

exercise’ was a strong

learning experience for

me- to know what is

it like for a patient to

hear voices and how it

could affect them on

different domains, so I

think that was a very

powerful method.”

– Staff and Associate

Grade Psychiatrist

“I had the feeling that

other people could read

my mind and hear the

same voices”

– ST4-6 Trainee

Psychiatrist

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 13

Page 150: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Listen Actively: Both verbal and non-verbal skills facilitate the

patient to say more and make the patient feel heard. This includes

paraphrasing, summarizing, allowing patient to complete statements

without interruption (Beckman 1984), giving patients the opportunity

to correct any misunderstandings (Maguire 1996) and paying

attention to patient’s prompts.

Respond: It is vital for psychiatrists to tailor their response to the

patient. For instance, if the patient is reporting improvements, this

can be reinforced, and if they report difficulties, these can be

acknowledged. Reassuring, supporting and reinforcing are key

communicative skills to establish a positive therapeutic relationship.

KEY REFERENCES:

McCabe, R. & Priebe, S. (2008) Communication and psychosis:

It’s good to talk but how? British Journal of Psychiatry, 192: 404-405.

McCabe et al. (2002) Engagement of patients with psychosis in the

consultation: conversation analytic study. British Medical Journal, 325: 1148-51.

“I realise that I should

check understanding

more often, to ensure

that the patient is

with me.”

– ST4-6 Trainee

Psychiatrist

PAGE 14 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 151: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 2: TECHNIQUES FOR WORKING WITH SYMPTOMS

AIMS AND METHODS

1. To develop techniques for responding to positive symptoms by

— Learning techniques for exploring and debating strong beliefs

— Eliciting and debating beliefs in paired role-play

— Learning techniques for exploring and debating beliefs

about voices

2. To develop techniques for working with negative symptoms by

— Reframing negative symptoms as protective

— Setting realistic goals in paired role-play

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION:

The techniques in this session are derived from Cognitive Behavioural

Therapy (CBT) for Schizophrenia (Kingdon 2007).

Negative symptoms: Focus groups revealed that psychiatrists often

struggle when working with patients with negative symptoms. They

feel ‘demotivated’, like they are ‘talking to a wall’. CBT offers specific

techniques to work with negative symptoms such as reframing

negative symptoms as protective and setting small, achievable goals.

The goal(s) must be identified by the patient him or herself.

Positive symptoms: In CBT a strong emphasis is placed on

understanding the first psychotic episode in detail as this often holds

the key to current beliefs and perceptions. Methods to elicit and

“I remember one of the

patients actually who

I used the negative

symptoms skills with.

The patient was quite

unwell. I told him ‘you

know, be realistic. If

you can start to think

about working in

about six months time,

that’s fine.’ This just

took the anxiety, and

made him realise that

it's all right to have a

healing period. So that

was something which I

thought was very good.”

– ST4-6 Trainee

Psychiatrist

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 15

Page 152: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

debate key beliefs, such as Socratic questioning and establishing the

evidence base, are useful when working with positive symptoms.

Furthermore, a mutual understanding of the psychotic symptoms and

a non-critical appreciation of the patients’ experience strengthens the

therapeutic relationship.

EAR-table: Applying EAR-skills when working with positive symptoms: working with strong beliefs

EAR-SKILLS RESPONDING TO POSITIVE SYMPTOMS: STRONG BELIEFS

Explore • Explore patient’s story of belief and individuality of perception & origin

• Discuss phenomena

Listen Actively • Show understanding and interest

• Check understanding of belief

Respond • Normalise ‘most people…’

• Debate coping

EAR-table: Applying EAR-skills when working with negative symptoms

EAR-SKILLS REFRAMING NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS

Explore Explore short and long term goals

Listen Actively Summarise periodically

Respond • Take the pressure off

• Collaboratively set SMART goals

KEY REFERENCES:

Kingdon, D., Turkington, D., Weiden, P. (2007).Cognitive Therapy for

Schizophrenia. American Journal of Psychiatry, 163: 365-373.

“I find ‘Normalising’ the

most useful technique,

to tell patients ‘this

is not the end, what

you’re experiencing is

not uncommon’ and

‘you've been understood

by someone and we're

trying to help you.’”

– Staff and Associate

Grade Psychiatrist

PAGE 16 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 153: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 3: EMPOWERING THE PATIENT

AIMS AND METHODS

1. To raise awareness and develop skills for collaborative agenda setting by

— Reviewing evidence on different patient and psychiatrist

priorities in psychiatric consultations

— Learning four agenda setting steps

— Reviewing and discussing real consultation examples

— Practising agenda setting steps 1 and 2 in role-play with

simulated patients and video-feedback

2. To raise awareness and develop skills for explaining the illness/psychosis and giving information by

— Reviewing real consultation examples

— Learning helpful strategies and phrases

— Respond to patient’s need for understanding their illness and

providing information in role-play with simulated patients and

video-feedback

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Agenda setting: The analysis of our dataset of video-recorded

consultations revealed that psychiatrists tend to ask at the end of

the consultation e.g. ‘anything else you’d like to discuss?’. However,

psychiatrists’ and patients’ agendas for outpatient consultations differ

considerably (Thomson 2010). Understanding the patients’ priorities

and agreeing on a mutual agenda for the consultation is an important

therapeutic process and correlates positively with symptom resolution

(Silverman 1995).

“Agenda setting gives

me more confidence

in structuring an

interview and more

control over it.”

– Staff and Associate

Grade Psychiatrist

“Explaining psychosis: It

is that balance between

providing information

to the patient about

their illness, medication

and so on, then

trying to attach to

make it personal, and

make it so that it

means something to

them and that is not

overwhelming them

with information.”

– Consultant

Psychiatrist

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 17

Page 154: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explaining psychosis: Our service-user interviews and our video data revealed that

many patients with psychosis want to know more about their illness. However, there

seems to be a difficulty in explaining psychosis in a lay way. Mitchell at al. (2007) found

that psychiatrists are reluctant to disclose difficult diagnoses such as schizophrenia.

However, some patients are left puzzled and confused by this absence of information

and explanation.

EAR-table: Applying EAR-skills to agenda setting

EAR-SKILLS AGENDA SETTING

Explore • Explore patient’s priorities for the session

• Check that you have understood their priorities

Listen Actively • Reflect patient’s language

• Summarise periodically

• ‘So what’s concerning you at the moment is…’

Respond • Acknowledge effect of patient’s concern

• Explain your own priorities

• Recap

EAR-table: Applying EAR-skills to explaining psychosis

EAR-SKILLS EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS

Explore • Explore patient’s understanding of the illness

• Explore patient’s need for information

Listen Actively • Listen for patient’s prompts

• Nonverbal feedback

• Echo – reflect what patient has said

Respond • Acknowledge patient’s concerns about psychosis

• Normalise experience

KEY REFERENCES:

Thomson, S. & Doody, G. (2010). Parallel paths? Different doctor and patient priorities in

psychiatric outpatient consultations. Journal of Mental Health, 19(5): 461-469.

Mitchell, A. (2007). Reluctance to disclose difficult diagnoses: a narrative review comparing

communication by oncologists and psychiatrists. Support Care Cancer, 15: 819-828.

PAGE 18 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 155: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 4: SHARED DECISION MAKING

AIMS AND METHODS

1. To raise awareness and develop skills for involving patients in decisions, particularly around medication by

— Reviewing the evidence on decision making in psychiatric

consultations

— Watching and discussing video clips of service users’

perspective on being informed and involved in decisions

— Learning four Shared Decision Making steps (GUNS) and

useful strategies for each step

— Watching and discussing clips of real consultation examples

on how to give an overview of all treatment options

— Offer patients an overview of treatment options and checking

patient’s understanding in role-play with simulated patients

and video-feedback

2. To develop negotiation strategies to improve shared decision making by

— Watching and discussing consultation clip showing a patient

who wants to come off medication

— Discussing the pros and cons of coming off medication

— Learning negotiation strategies and watching and discussing

real consultation examples for each strategy

— Using negotiation strategies when discussing medication with

simulated patient in role-play and video-feedback

“The GUNS shared

decision making steps

were excellent”

– ST4-6 Trainee

Psychiatrist

“The rehearsal after

having received

feedback from the

trainer on the role-play

worked well.”

– Staff and Associate

Grade Psychiatrist

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 19

Page 156: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Involving patients with psychotic illness in decisions has been found to be associated

with treatment adherence (Dooley in preparation). Research has further shown that the

majority of decisions made in psychiatric consultations involving psychosis patients are

decisions around anti-psychotic medication. Session 4 therefore focuses on decision-

making relating to anti-psychotic medication, targeting skills for systematically involving

patients in decisions and practising negotiation strategies in case of disagreement.

EAR-table: Applying EAR-skills to decision making

EAR-SKILLS SHARED DECISION MAKING

Explore • Explore preference, understanding & concern regarding treatment & options

• Explore patient’s expectations of how problem might be managed

Listen Actively • Reflect back patient’s statements

• Check patient’s understanding of options

Respond • Show support by working with patient’s concerns

• Explain treatment options

• Step back and be less forceful

• Double sided reflection

• Agree to differ

• Reach compromise & review decision

KEY REFERENCES:

McCabe, R., Khanom, H., Bailey, P., Priebe, S. (2013) Shared Decision Making in Ongoing

Outpatient Psychiatric Treatment, Patient Education and Counseling, 91: 326-328.

Torrey, W. & Drake, R. (2010). Practicing Shared Decision Making in the Outpatient

Psychiatric Care of Adults with Severe Mental Health Illnesses: Redesigning Care for the

Future. Community Mental Health Journal, 46: 433-440.

PAGE 20 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 157: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

INDIVIDUALISED FEEDBACK SESSION

AIMS AND METHODS

1. To reflect on one’s own communication with patients with psychosis

— By reviewing one’s own video-recorded consultation(s),

reflecting on their communicative behaviour and how patients

respond, and also how this varies depending on the patient

2. To identify things to try differently

— By noticing areas that work less well

3. Facilitating the translation of new skills into practice

— By choosing skills and setting up a concrete plan of how

to use them in practice - using the ‘EAR-skills action plan’

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Reviewing and reflecting on one’s own ‘real’ communication with

patients on the basis of video-recordings has been used effectively

to train health professionals (e.g. Kitzinger 2007). This training

programme incorporates this technique in a more individualised and

systematic way. The approach is tailored to need, offering the option

to choose between individual or group sessions. Specific action

setting via the ‘EAR-skills action plan’ further facilitates the translation

of the new skills into practice.

The individual or group ‘individualised feedback sessions’ should

be offered to all participants following the four group sessions (see

“Guidance on facilitating training” section for instruction details).

“Seeing yourself actually

with a patient - I think

that was the most

important part of the

training because I've

never seen myself in

communication with a

patient before.”

– ST4-6 Trainee

Psychiatrist

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 21

Page 158: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Individual or group sessions? The format is flexible and can be run as one-to-one

(facilitator and participant) or as a group sessions (3-4 participants who attended the

training sessions). Both formats have advantages and disadvantages. The peer-group

may provide valuable advice and feedback. However, some participants may not feel

comfortable watching their recordings with their colleagues. Both formats should be

offered to participants.

PAGE 22 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 159: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

GUIDANCE FOR FACILITATORS

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 23

Page 160: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 24 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 161: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

GUIDANCE ON USING THE MANUAL

In this section you will find information on how to use the training materials and methods

to facilitate learning.

USING THE ‘TEMPO’ FACILITATOR’S MANUAL

The facilitator’s manual contains the introduction, guidance and notes for facilitators

as well as schedules, instructions and photocopiable materials (slides, handouts and

instructions for exercises) for each session.

USING THE ‘TEMPO’ DVD-ROM

The DVD-Rom includes power point presentations for each session, video clips of 'real

consultation examples' and 'service user perspectives', an audio clip for the hearing voices

exercise as well as supplementary reading for each session.

LEARNING MATERIALS

Two forms of learning material are provided for each session:

— Teaching aids

These are materials for facilitators to use during the sessions. They include

schedules and instructions for facilitators, key points, PowerPoint Slides with

speaker’s notes and instructions for the exercises along with instructions for actors

in the role-plays.

— Handouts

These are materials that should be given to the participants in the sessions,

including self-appraisal questionnaires, instructions for exercises and ‘skills

booklets’, which contain key points, helpful phrases, EAR-tables and action plans.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 25

Page 162: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

GUIDANCE ON FACILITATING THE TRAINING

FACILITATORS

Ideally, two facilitators should run the sessions. Between them, they should have an

understanding of psychosis and communication. A combination of a communication skills

facilitator and an experienced psychiatrist who is interested in communication works well.

In order to ensure continuity, at least one facilitator should be the same across all of the

sessions. It is optional to involve more facilitators who can deliver aspects of the training

programme relevant to their expertise (e.g. CBT). However, a second co-facilitator is

required for session 3 and 4 to run the role-plays with actors in sub-groups.

PRACTICALITIES

The ‘TEMPO’ training programme can be delivered in a number of different ways. It is

possible to pick and mix aspects of the training sections and to adapt these according

to your immediate course requirements and learners’ needs.

TIMING

Each of the four group sessions is scheduled for three hours. The four training sessions

are usually most effective when run as half-day sessions on four consecutive weeks.

Alternatively the four sessions could be run across two full days.

Where feasible, a group or individual ‘seeing yourself session’ should be run

approximately two weeks after the last session in order to allow time to practise the skills

and feedback on this. Depending on the length of the video-recorded consultation, the

session should take approx. 1.5 to 2.5 hours.

GROUP SIZE

The recommended maximum group size for the group sessions is eight, but this will vary

in different places and circumstances. Facilitators may need to adapt group work and

timing if the groups are significantly larger or smaller.

As some of the work takes place in pairs and subgroups, it is recommended to have equal

numbers of participants. Where this is not possible, exercises such as the paired role-play

could be conducted in groups of three.

PAGE 26 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 163: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

ACCOMMODATION

It is important to run the training in a space that is large enough to comfortably move

freely during the group work. Ideally, two rooms are required for the hearing voices

exercise in session 1 and for the role-plays in sub-groups in sessions 3 and 4.

EQUIPMENT

The minimum equipment needed is:

— Overhead projector with screen

— Flipcharts and pens

— A laptop computer with PowerPoint is needed to access the CD-rom material

— MP3 players are required for the hearing voices exercise in session 1

— Two video-cameras and usb-connecting cables are required to film and enable

video-feedback for role-plays in session 3 and 4

RUNNING GROUP SESSIONS - CREATING A SUPPORTIVE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT

The challenges faced when communicating with psychosis patients, the pros and cons of

discontinuing medication, and particularly the giving and receiving of feedback on their

own communication with patients (e.g. in role-plays and individualised feedback sessions)

may present sensitive subjects of discussion for the psychiatrists. It is therefore essential to

create a learning environment that is perceived as being supportive enough for learners

to explore and review their own communication and that provides the emotional and

physical support needed to enhance learning.

In order to further accommodate any anxiety of being judged and scrutinised as a

good/bad communicator, it is suggested to emphasise throughout the training that the

participating psychiatrists are the experts who are already equipped with effective and

positive communication skills. The objective of the training is solely to further develop

these skills and to learn from each other.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 27

Page 164: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

USING THE TRAINING METHODS

WORKING WITH REAL CONSULTATION EXAMPLES

The ‘real consultation example’ video clips are used as a method for facilitating group

discussions. The questions relating to a specific clip will vary according to the content area.

The ‘schedule and instructions for facilitators’ for each session provides information on

how to work with the specific clip and outlines suggested questions.

PROCEDURE:

1. Prior to watching the clip, instruct participants to have one of the corresponding

questions in mind when watching it (according to instructions in teaching aid, e.g.

“what was good/could be improved?” in sessions 4 ‘giving overview’)

2. Discuss the participants’ perception and point of views in the group.

3. Where appropriate, ask:

— What are alternative ways of responding?

— What did you notice in the psychiatrist’s / patient’s communicative behaviour?

ROLE-PLAYS

Role-play with simulated patient and video feedback

PREPARATION:

If you are using professional actors, arrange a meeting prior to the session to conduct

their briefing. It may be useful to show them videos of patients with psychosis to increase

their understanding of the typical verbal and non-verbal communicative behaviour of

these patients.

Brief the actors using the ‘information for actors’ instructions.

If you do not have the option to use professional actors, participants can be briefed to

play the patient instead. In the first session, assign the psychiatrist and patient role to all

PAGE 28 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 165: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

participants. Pass on the ‘information for actors’ teaching aids to the participants who

have been assigned the patient role and ask them to prepare themselves for the role in

the following session.

The role-play takes place in two groups of 3-4 psychiatrists (with groups of 6-8). Each

group is led by one facilitator, and includes one actor who plays the patient. Each

psychiatrist should have a turn at doing the role-play. If there are 3 psychiatrists, allow

15 minutes per psychiatrist. If there are 4 psychiatrists, allow 10 minutes per psychiatrist.

Give each psychiatrist the ‘information for psychiatrists’ handout. Ask observing

psychiatrists to take notes while observing the role-play. Ask the participant to practise

the new skills within the role-play. Set up a video-camera to record the role-play.

PROCEDURE:

1. Ask observing psychiatrists to get pen and paper to take notes during role-play.

2. Allow approx. 5 minutes for the first round of role-play.

3. Following this, ask for the participants’ self-reflection, i.e. ask participants what went

well, where they feel they had difficulty or got stuck.

4. Ask the actor to provide in-role feedback.

5. Ask the other participants who were observing the role-play how they perceived the

role-play/the communication.

6. Offer your feedback, offer suggestions for alternative ways of conducting

the interview; provide suggestions on request from the person conducting the

interview; or supply a replacement interviewer who can attempt to put any

suggestions into effect.

7. Ask the participants to identify a particular moment or situation in the role-play that

they found challenging, where they feel they had difficulty or got stuck, i.e. that they

would have liked to have done differently.

8. Play this part of the video recorded role-play back, with the aim of identifying how

the psychiatrist would do it differently.

9. The psychiatrist should then have another go at this particular part of the

role-play.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 29

Page 166: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

RULES OF FEEDBACK

When giving feedback:

— Always be positive about the other’s performance

— Identify the good parts of the interview – be specific about what was good

and why

— Discuss the parts, which could be improved - always suggest positive alternatives

PAIRED ROLE-PLAYS

PREPARATION

Ensure that the room provides enough space for all pairs to role-play. Timing may vary

according to session. Please follow instructions corresponding to the particular role-play.

PROCEDURE:

1. The group works in pairs.

2. Instruct the participants to assign the role of patient and psychiatrist. Ask the

participant playing the patient to ‘play’ one of their own patients who they have

seen recently. Instruct the participant who plays the psychiatrist to practise the newly

acquired skills in the role-play.

3. All pairs play at the same time, i.e. not in front of the whole group.

4. While they are playing, move around the room between pairs, listening and helping

out with useful words and phrases to move the process along.

5. Allow 5 - 15 minutes for each turn (according to instructions).

6. At the end of each turn, both ‘psychiatrist’ and ‘patient’ give feedback ‘out of role’,

observing the rules of feedback and then ask the pairs to swop roles.

7. Following this, ask all participants to feedback their experience to the group. Firstly,

ask what it was like to be the patient, what psychiatrist behaviour they perceived as

positive/negative. Secondly, ask for feedback on the ‘psychiatrist’s role’ and how they

experienced the use of the new skills.

PAGE 30 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 167: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

ACTION SETTING

PROCEDURE:

1. At the end of each group session, hand out the skills booklet, which contains a

summary of the content of the session along with useful phrases.

2. Using the action plan on the skills booklet, ask the participants to write down two

of the skills learned in the session that they want to practise in the following week.

3. Instruct the group to rate on a scale from 0 to 10 a) how important is it to them to

use this in practice in the next week and b) how confident they are that they will use

the skill in practice in the next week.

4. Ask them to bring back the booklet with the completed action plan for the

following session.

5. At the beginning of the next session, ask the participants to discuss in pairs for

10 minutes the two skills they tried, what success they enjoyed and what challenges

arose. Following the discussion in pairs, ask the participants to feed back to the group.

Allow 5 minutes for this group discussion. Ask how patients responded to the

new skills, whether they are likely to use the skill again and how it could be

developed further.

INDIVIDUALISED FEEDBACK SESSION

Individual or group ‘individualised feedback sessions’ should be offered to all participants

following the end of the group training programme (i.e. the four sessions).

PREPARATION:

In order to conduct these sessions, at least one of the psychiatrist’s consultations with

one of their own patients needs to be video-recorded prior to the session.

PROCEDURE:

1. Hand out the EAR-action-plan table.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 31

Page 168: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

2. Conduct a brief refresher session: Summarise skills and themes covered in the training.

3. Explain the aims of the ‘seeing yourself session

• Identify how and where new Communication Skills can be applied

• What areas/skills relating to their own communicative behaviour they would

like to work on

4. Ask participants to watch video recording of their own consultation with these two

aims in mind and to pause the video when they identify an area where the skills

could be applied or where a communicative behaviour was identified that could be

improved.

5. Watch the video and wait for participant to pause the video and discuss what they

noticed, how they could have communicated differently and/or how a specific skill

could have worked in this particular situation. Your role is to assist the participant in

this process and to give some specific feedback. In particular, help the participant in

understanding their own ‘typical’ communication and to work together to establish

how the new skills can be applied.

6. Using the EAR-action-plan table, ask participants to write down how and when they

intend to use the skill in practice.

PAGE 32 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 169: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

REFERENCES

Beckman H.B., Frankel R.M. (1984) The effect of physician behavior on the

collection of data. Annual International Medicine, 101:692–6.

Bhugra, D. (2008) Renewing psychiatry’s contract with society. Psychiatric Bulletin,

32: 281-283.

Deegan, P. E. (1996). Hearing voices that are distressing: A training and simulated experience. Lawrence, MA: The National Empowerment Center, Inc.

Dooley, J., Jones, N., McCabe, R. (in preparation). Patient Centred Communication

and Shared Decision Making in Schizophrenia: Links to patient satisfaction and

adherence to medication.

Gask, L. (1998) Small group interactive techniques utilizing video feedback. International Journal of Psychiatry in Medicine, 28: 97-113.

Harrison, J. & Goldberg, D. (1993) Improving the interview skills of psychiatric

trainees. European Journal of Psychiatry, 7: 31-40.

Jenkins, V. & Fallowfield, L. (2002) Can communication skills training change

physicians’ beliefs and behaviour in clinics? Journal of Clinical Oncology, 20: 765-769.

Kai, J (ed) (2005). Valuing Diversity (second edition). A resource for health professional training to respond to cultural diversity. London: Royal College of

General Practioners.

Kingdon, D., Turkington, D., Weiden, P. (2007).Cognitive Therapy for Schizophrenia.

American Journal of Psychiatry, 163: 365-373.

Kitzinger, C & Kitzinger, S. (2007) Birth Trauma: Talking with women and the value

of conversation analysis. British Journal of Midwifery, 15(5): 256-264.

Kurtz, S.M, & Silverman, J.D. (1996) The Calgary-Cambridge Referenced

Observation Guides: an aid to defining the curriculum and organizing the teaching

in communication training programmes. Medical Communication, 30(2): 83-90.

Maguire, P. & Pitceathly, C. (2002) Key communication skills and how to acquire

them. British Medical Journal, 325: 697-700.

Maguire, P., Faulkner, A., Booth, K., Elliott, C., Hillier, V. (1996) helping cancer

patients disclose their concerns. European Journal of Cancer, 32(1): 78-81.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 33

Page 170: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Maguire, G., Goldberg, Hobson, R. (1984) Evaluating the teaching of a method in

psychotherapy. British Journal of Psychiatry, 144: 575-580.

McCabe, R., Khanom, H., Bailey, P., Priebe, S. (2013) Shared Decision Making in

Ongoing Outpatient Psychiatric Treatment, Patient Education and Counseling, 91:

326-328.

McCabe, R. & Priebe, S. (2008) Communication and psychosis: It’s good to talk

but how? British Journal of Psychiatry, 192: 404-405.

McCabe, R., Priebe, S. (2004). The therapeutic relationship in the treatment of

severe mental illness: A review of methods and findings. International Journal of Social Psychiatry, 50 (2): 115-128.

McCabe, R., Heath, C., Burns, T., Priebe, S. (2002) Engagement of patients with

psychosis in the consultation: conversation analytic study. British Medical Journal, 325: 1148-51.

Mitchel, A. (2007). Reluctance to disclose difficult diagnoses: a narrative review

comparing communication by oncologists and psychiatrists. Support Care Cancer, 15: 819-828.

Pinfold, V. & Corry, P. (2003) Right from the start: The second Rethink report on reaching people early. London: Rethink Publications.

Pomerantz, A. (2005) Using participants’ video stimulated comments to

complement analyses of interactional practices. In Te Molder H, Potter J, editors.

Talk and cognition: discourse, mind and social interaction. Cambridge: Cambridge

University Press, p. 93-113.

Roter, D. L. & Hall, J. A. (2006) Doctors talking to patients/patients talking to doctors: Improving communication in medical visits, 2nd ed. Westport, CT: Praeger.

Silverman, J. & Draper, J. (1995) Identifying the agenda in the consultation. British Journal of General Practice, 45: 52-53.

Thomson, S. & Doody, G. (2010). Parallel paths? Different doctor and patient

priorities in psychiatric outpatient consultations. Journal of Mental Health, 19(5): 461-469.

Torrey, W & Drake, R (2010) Practicing Shared Decision Making in the Outpatient

Psychiatric Care of Adults with Severe Mental Health Illnesses: Redesigning Care

for the Future. Community Mental Health Journal, 46: 433-440.

Whitehouse, C., Morris, P., Marks, B. (1984) The role of actors in teaching

communication. Medical Education, 18(4): 262-268.

PAGE 34 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 171: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 1

Understanding the patient with psychosis

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 35

Page 172: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 36 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 173: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SUMMARY

The first half of this session focuses on understanding the patient with psychosis. Firstly,

common challenges for both psychiatrists and patients when communicating with each

other are discussed in the group. Psychiatrists then participate in an experiential ‘hearing

voices exercise’. The second half of the session focuses on generic communication skills,

to be applied to specific content areas. The core communication skills are EAR skills:

Explore, Listen Actively and Respond. In sessions 2-4, the EAR-skills are applied to the

five content areas: positive symptoms, negative symptoms, agenda setting, explaining

psychosis and decision-making.

LEARNING OUTCOMES Develop empathy for patient’s

experience of psychosis

Develop EAR skills

METHODS Didactic teaching; pair and group

discussion; experiential (hearing

voices) exercise; working with real

consultation examples; role-play in

pairs, action setting, self-evaluation

MATERIALS Power-point presentation; flipchart;

self-appraisal questionnaire;

instructions, MP3 players (for each

participant) and tasks for voices

simulation exercise, video clips of

real consultations; action plan;

skills booklet

OTHERS’ INVOLVEMENT Assistance required to conduct

exercise 1: hearing voices exercise

DURATION 3 hours

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 37

Page 174: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TIMETABLE AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEMES

5 mins Slide 1: Welcome and introduction Attitudes/ expectations

1 INTRO-DUCTION

5 mins Self-appraisal: Each participant to complete handout 1a and keep for last session

Self-appraisal 1

Hand-out 1a

5 mins Slide 2: Overview of training and focus of session 1

Didactic teaching

2

5 mins Slide 3: Findings on relevance of good communication

Didactic teaching

3

15 mins Slide 4: Discussion on challenges when communicating with patients with psychosis (10 mins)

Feedback to the group (5 mins): Write down all issues on flipchart and leave them up to come back to over course of training

In pair discussion Feedback

4

Flipchart

CHALLENGES

5 mins Slide 5-7: Evidence on relevance of communicating about psychotic symptoms (supplementary reading: McCabe 2002)

Didactic teaching

5-7

40 mins Slide 8: Hearing voices exercise

Follow instructions on teaching aid I

Voices simulation exercise

8

Handouts 1b-f

Teaching aid I

Mp3 players

EXPERIENC-ING PSYCHOSIS – HEARING VOICES

10 mins Feedback to the group Feedback 8

15 mins Break 9

10 mins Slide 10: EAR-skills

Slide 11: What to explore in a psychiatric consultation

Slide 12: Explore symptoms, worries, expectations

Slide 13: Use of open and closed questions

Slide 14: Explore

Slide 15: Listen Actively

Slide 16: Respond

Didactic teaching / Skills

10-16 EAR SKILLS

15 mins Slide 17: Identify EAR skills in ‘money worry’ video clip

Slide 18: Identify EAR skills in ‘positive encouragement’ clip

Real consultation examples

17-18

PAGE 38 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 175: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES

Session slides available on TEMPO DVD

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEMES

40 mins Slide 19: Practise active listening in role-play & feedback to the group

Role-play 19

Teaching aid II: Role-play instructions

EAR SKILLS

10 mins Slide 20:

Hand out skills booklet

Action planning

Action planning

20-21

Handout 1g:

Skills booklet

3hrs End.

TEMPO  –  Training  to  Enhance  Communica5on  with  Pa5ents  with  

Psychosis  

Session  1  Understanding  the  pa3ent  with  

psychosis  Individualised  feedback  

 Review  and  reflect  on  your  communica5on  

Session  4:  Shared  Decision  Making  

Involving  pa5ents  in  decisions   Nego5a5on  skills  

Session  3:  Empowering  the  pa5ent  

Agenda  SeKng   Explaining  Psychosis  

Session  2:  Techniques  for  working  with  symptoms  

Responding  to  posi5ve  symptoms   Reframing  nega5ve  symptoms  

Session  1:  Understanding  the  pa5ent  with  psychosis  

Experiencing  Psychosis   EAR:  Explore  Listen  Ac5vely  Respond    

Challenges  

In  pairs  discuss…  • What  issues  have  you  faced  when  working  with  pa5ents  experiencing  psychosis?  

• What  might  the  issues  be  for  pa5ents?  

Group  discussion…    

•  Feedback  to  group.  

Slide 1

Slide 3

Slide 2

Slide 4

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 39

Page 176: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

Communicating about psychotic experiences

•  Avoidance  –  fear  of  disagreement  •  Pa5ents  don’t  feel  understood  •  Pa5ents  ‘confront’  •   Disagreement  between  psychiatrist  &  pa5ent  •  Not  a  good  basis  for  treatment  engagement  &  adherence  

•  Qualita5vely  different  experience  •  Not  a  good  basis  for  nego5a5ng  about  treatment  

•  McCabe  et  al.  (2002)  Engagement  of  pa5ents  with  psychosis  in  the  consulta5on:  conversa5on  analy5c  study,  Bri5sh  Medical  Journal,  325:  1148-­‐51.    

Break!  

EAR  Skills  

•  Explore     What?  

Transcript  

Mother:       Okay  three  months  5me  Dr:         So  Pa5ent:       Why  don’t  people  believe  me  doctor           when  I  say  I’m  God?  Why  don’t  they           believe  me,  cos  everyone  knows  I  am?  

Dr:         What  shall  I  say  now?  Mother:       ha-­‐ha  Dr:         Well  you  are  free  to  believe  it  but           people  are  free  not  to  believe  you.  

Experiencing  psychosis  

What  do  psycho,c  symptoms  feel  like?  

•  Hearing  voices  simula5on  exercise  

•  Feedback  experience  to  group  

EAR  Skills  

Pa5ents  want  to  feel  heard  and  understood  

•  Explore  •  Listen  Ac5vely  •  Respond  

Explore    •  Explore:       -­‐  Symptoms,  Experience,  Ideas,  Feelings:  

•  How  are  you  in  yourself?  •  How  does  it  make  you  feel?  •  How  do  you  cope  with  it  when  it  happens?  •  What’s  your  understanding  of  that?  •   How  are  things  at  home?  

  -­‐  Worries,  Concerns  •  What  are  you  worried  about?  

  -­‐  Expecta5ons  •  What  were  you  wan5ng  to  talk  about  today?  

Slide 5

Slide 7

Slide 9

Slide 11

Slide 6

Slide 8

Slide 10

Slide 12

PAGE 40 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 177: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explore:  Open  to  closed    vs.  closed  ques5ons  

Listen  Ac5vely    

•  What  makes  you  feel  listened  to?  •  Skills  that  help  the  pa5ent  to  talk  

Wait:  •  Give  pa5ent  5me  to  think  before  answering  •  Allow  pa5ent  to  complete  statements  without  interrup5on  

Non-­‐verbal  behaviour:  • posture,  gaze,  nodding  

•  Summarize  periodically,  invite  pa5ent  to  revise  Can  I  check  that  I  have  understood?  What  you  have  told  me  is…    So  from  what  you  have  said  ………….  Have  I  got  that  right?  

EAR-­‐skills  

Ac5ve  Listening  Role-­‐play  

•  In  pairs  assign  psychiatrist  and  pa5ent  role  – Pa5ent  presents  concern  – Psychiatrist  to  listen  ac5vely  using  EAR  skills  – Psychiatrist  to  then  respond  –  acknowledge*  

•  Now  swap  roles…  •  Feedback  in  group  

*NB  –  do  not  give  advice  or  explain  yet  

Explore    

•  Avoid  leading  ques5ons  &  presump5ons    

– Real  consulta5on  examples:  • ‘The  voices  don’t  bother  you  do  they?’    • ‘You  weren’t  suffering  from  any  paranoia?’  • ‘No  side-­‐effects  at  all?’    

Respond  •  Specific  follow-­‐up  ques5ons  (depends  on  topic)  •  VALIDATION    

–  If  pa5ent  is  expressing  or  repor5ng  difficul5es:  Acknowledge  pa5ents’  feelings,  concerns  BUT  not  empty  empathy  (“I  understand”,  “That  must  be  very  difficult”)    

•  You  seem  (frustrated,  worried,  sad)…….  

•  It  sounds  like  that  is  very  hard/distressing  etc……  –  If  pa5ent  is  expressing,  repor5ng  posi5ves:    

  Reinforce  how  the  pa5ent  manages  and  posi5ve  steps  they  have  taken  •  It  sounds  like  you  are  dealing  with  it  very  well…  •  I  can  see  you  are  feeling  pleased  with  how  things  are…….  

EAR-­‐skills  

Skills  booklet  

• Content:  – Learning  points,  helpful  phrases,  ac5on  plan    

Ac5on  planning  •  Choose  2  of  the  EAR-­‐skills  you  think  would  benefit  your  prac5ce  this  week.    1.  

2.  

How  important  is  it  to  you  to  use  this  in  your  prac5ce  in  the  next  week?  

                               

How  confident  are  you  that  you  will  use  it  in  your  prac5ce  in  the  next  week?  Not  important  at  all   Extremely  important  

0   5   10  

Not  confident  at  all   Extremely  confident  

0   5   10  

Slide 13

Slide 15

Slide 17

Slide 19

Slide 14

Slide 16

Slide 18

Slide 20

Slide 21 TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 41

Page 178: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1A: PRE-TRAINING SELF-APPRAISAL QUESTIONNAIRE

1. I find it easy to consider the patient’s

perspective on voices and delusions.

2. I feel comfortable working with patients

with negative symptoms.

3. I feel comfortable working with beliefs

about voices and delusions.

4. I feel comfortable asking patients what

they want to talk about and setting an

agenda early in the consultation.

5. I feel comfortable reassuring patients.

6. I feel comfortable explaining psychotic

illness to patients.

7. I feel comfortable asking patients if

they need information and giving them

information.

8. I feel comfortable asking patients what

they don’t like about their treatment

(e.g. medication).

9. I feel comfortable offering patients

choices about treatment and asking

about their concerns and preferences.

10. I feel comfortable dealing with

disagreements.

1

NOT AT ALL VERY

5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

PAGE 42 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 179: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID I: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

EXERCISE: A SIMULATION OF HEARING DISTRESSING VOICES

PROCEDURE

1. Hand out mp3 players to participants and instruct participants to

listen to the 3 minute instruction.

2. Once everyone has heard the instruction, ask participants to

conduct the first task (the ‘go outside’ task, handout 1b). Hand

out some change to the participants (for buying a coffee/tea at

the canteen/cafeteria). Ask participants to return after 15 minutes.

3. Once participants are back from the first task, introduce the

second task, the cognitive task (word finding task, handout 1c

and/or number finding 1d). Instruct participants to find as many

words/number series as possible from the words/numbers listed.

4. While participants are working on the word finding task, ask

individual participants, one by one, to follow you to another room.

Here you apply task 3, the Mental State Examination (handout 1e),

with each participant.

5. Task 2 and 3 are being conducted simultaneously, lasting approx.

20mins in total.

6. Once everybody has conducted the Mental State Examination,

introduce the fourth task, the ‘balloon dilemma discussion’. Give

participants 10 minutes time for this task.

7. Feedback in group.

PURPOSE

Developing empathy

for the lived

experience of hearing

distressing voices

TIME

The estimated time of

this exercise in a group

of 8 participants is

40 minutes.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 43

Page 180: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1B: TASK 1 OUTDOORS EXERCISE

Go outside and walk around by yourself.

You may talk to others, but not to other people doing the exercise.

Don’t alter the volume and don’t take headphones out at any time.

Go to a canteen/cafeteria and buy something or ask a question about one of the products (e.g. “how much is…?).

PAGE 44 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 181: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1C: TASK 2 NUMBER SEARCH

7 DIGIT NUMBERS

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 45

Page 182: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1D: TASK 2 WORD SEARCH

ANIMALS

PAGE 46 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 183: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1E: TASK 3 MENTAL STATE EXAMINATION

1. What is today’s date? The year? The day of the week?

2. I am going to say five numbers and I want you to repeat them back to me when I am done: 5, 23, 67, 2, 676.

3. I am going to say five numbers and I want you to repeat them to me backwards. For instance, if I said “5, 22, 45, 6” you would say “6, 45, 22, 5”. Do you understand the instructions? Okay, here are the numbers: 23, 4, 96, 58.

4. Who is the Prime Minister of the United Kingdom? Who is the deputy Prime Minister?

5. I am going to say five words. You don’t have to repeat them back to me now, but try to listen carefully: cat, book, cigar, damage, rain.

6. Name the last four Prime Ministers of the UK.

7. Starting at the number 100, I want you to count backwards by seven (100, 93, 86, 79, 72, 65 … enough).

8. Can you remember any of those words I said to you a few minutes ago?

9. What does “A rolling stone gathers no moss” mean?

10. What does “People who live in glass houses should not throw stones” mean?

Note to facilitator: Do not tell the participant the answers if they ask and do not tell them whether or not they have answered correctly. You could say, “That’s not important now. I just want you to focus on answering the questions as well as you can.”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 47

Page 184: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1F: TASK 4 ‘BALLOON DEBATE’

INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICIPANTS

Take five minutes to discuss this dilemma in your group. You will need to come to a joint

decision at the end of these five minutes on the best solution to this dilemma.

THE SITUATION

Four people are in a hot air balloon. The balloon is losing height and about to crash into

the mountains. Having thrown everything imaginable out of the balloon, including food,

sandbags and parachutes, their only hope is for one of them to jump to their certain

death to give the balloon the extra height to clear the mountains and save the other two.

But who is it to be?

The four people are:

Dr. Nick Riviera – a cancer research scientist who believes he is on the brink of

discovering a cure for most common types of cancer.

Mrs. Susie Derkins – a primary school teacher. She is over the moon because she

is seven months pregnant with her second child.

Mr. Tom Derkins – the balloon pilot. He is the husband of Susie, whom he loves

very much. He is also the only one with any balloon flying experience.

Miss Carla Jenkins – nine years old and a child prodigy who is tipped to become

the next Mozart.

PAGE 48 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 185: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID II: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 1 - ACTIVE LISTENING ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

Ensure that the room provides enough space for all pairs to role-play

in. Allow 30 minutes for the role-play (15 minutes for each turn) and

10 minutes for debriefing in the group.

PROCEDURE

1. The group works in pairs

2. Instruct the participants to assign the role of patient and

psychiatrist. Ask the participant playing the patient to ‘play’ one

of their own patients who they have seen recently. The patient

presents a particular concern. Instruct the participant who plays

the psychiatrist to practise listening actively using EAR skills,

particularily bearing in mind:

• Really listen to your patient!

• Don’t interrupt and don’t give any advice!

3. All pairs play at the same time and not in front of the whole group.

4. While they are role-playing, move around the room between

pairs, listening and helping out with useful words and phrases

to move the process along.

5. Allow 10 minutes for each turn.

6. At the end of each turn, ask the ‘psychiatrist’ to repeat what

was said – without interpretation. Then the ‘patient’ should give

feedback on what the psychiatrist did that made them feel heard/

listened to (allow 5 minutes). Then ask the pairs to swop roles (and

run another 10 minutes role-play followed by 5 minute feedback).

Following this (i.e. after 30 minutes), ask all participants to feed back their

experience to the group. Firstly, ask what it was like to be the patient,

what psychiatrist behaviour they perceived as positive, i.e. made them feel

listened to. Secondly, ask for feedback on the ‘psychiatrists role’ regarding

the use of active listening skills and the information elicited.

AIM

Participants to practise

Active Listening

Raise awareness of the

kind and quantity of

information that can

be elicited by using

active listening skills

‘Be in the patient’s

shoes’: Experience

what psychiatrist

behaviour makes the

patient feel heard/

listened to

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 49

Page 186: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN PSYCHOSIS TRAINING PROGRAMME

FRAMEWORK

SESSION 4: SHARED DECISION MAKING

Involving patients in decisions Negotiation skills

SESSION 3: EMPOWERING THE PATIENT

Agenda Setting Explaining Psychosis

SESSION 2: TECHNIQUES FOR WORKING WITH SYMPTOMS

Responding to positive symptoms Reframing negative symptoms

SESSION 1: UNDERSTANDING THE PATIENT WITH PSYCHOSIS

Experiencing Psychosis EAR: Explore Listen Actively Respond

HANDOUT 1G: SKILLS BOOKLET SESSION 1

PAGE 50 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

FR

AM

EWO

RK

:EA

R -

SKIL

LS:

SESS

ION

4: S

HA

RED

DEC

ISIO

N M

AKI

NG

Invo

lvin

g pa

tien

ts in

dec

isio

nsN

egot

iati

on s

kills

SESS

ION

3: E

MP

OW

ERIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

Age

nda

Sett

ing

Exp

lain

ing

Psy

chos

is

SESS

ION

2: T

ECH

NIQ

UES

FO

R W

OR

KIN

G W

ITH

SYM

PTO

MS

Res

pond

ing

to p

osit

ive

sym

ptom

sR

efra

min

g ne

gati

ve s

ympt

oms

SESS

ION

1: U

ND

ERST

AN

DIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

WIT

H P

SYC

HO

SIS

Exp

erie

ncin

g P

sych

osis

EAR

: Exp

lore

Lis

ten

Act

ivel

y R

espo

nd

EXPL

OR

E

Sym

ptom

s, E

xper

ienc

e,

Idea

s, F

eelin

gs:

"How

are

you

in y

ours

elf?

"

"How

doe

s it

mak

e yo

u fe

el?"

"How

do

you

cope

wit

h it

w

hen

it h

appe

ns?"

"Wha

t’s

your

un

ders

tand

ing

of t

hat?

"How

are

thi

ngs

at h

ome?

"

Wor

ries

, Con

cern

s

"Wha

t ar

e yo

u w

orri

ed

abou

t?"

Expe

ctat

ions

"Wha

t w

ere

you

wan

ting

to

tal

k ab

out

toda

y?"

Avo

id le

adin

g qu

esti

ons

and

assu

mpt

ions

!

LIST

EN A

CTI

VEL

Y

Skill

s th

at fa

cilit

ate

the

pati

ent t

o sa

y m

ore

Wai

t:•

Giv

e pa

tien

t tim

e to

th

ink

befo

re a

nsw

erin

g

• A

llow

pat

ient

to

com

plet

e st

atem

ents

w

itho

ut in

terr

upti

on

Non

-ver

bals

:•

post

ure,

gaz

e, n

oddi

ng

Wat

ch fo

r cu

es:

• ec

ho

Sum

mar

ize

peri

odic

ally

, in

vite

pat

ient

to r

evis

e

"Can

I ch

eck

that

I ha

ve

unde

rsto

od?

Wha

t yo

u ha

ve t

old

me

is…

"

"Can

I ju

st s

umm

ariz

e so

fa

r?"

"Hav

e I g

ot t

hat

righ

t?"

RES

PO

ND

Spec

ific

follo

w-u

p qu

esti

ons

(dep

ends

on

topi

c)

VALI

DAT

ION

If pa

tient

is e

xpre

ssin

g or

re

port

ing

diffi

culti

es:

Ack

now

ledg

e pa

tient

s’

feel

ings

, con

cern

s B

UT

not e

mpt

y em

path

y (“

I un

ders

tand

”, “T

hat m

ust

be v

ery

diffi

cult”

)

"You

see

m (

frus

trat

ed,

wor

ried

, sad

)……

."

"It

soun

ds li

ke t

hat

is v

ery

hard

/dis

tres

sing

etc

……

"

If p

atie

nt is

exp

ress

ing,

re

port

ing

posi

tives

:

Rei

nfor

ce h

ow th

e pa

tien

t man

ages

and

po

sitiv

e st

eps

they

hav

e ta

ken

"It

soun

ds li

ke y

ou a

re

deal

ing

wit

h it

ver

y w

ell…

"

"I c

an s

ee y

ou a

re fe

elin

g pl

ease

d w

ith

how

thi

ngs

are…

"

COM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N S

KILL

S IN

PSY

CHO

SIS

TRAI

NIN

G P

ROG

RAM

ME

– SE

SSIO

N 1

: UN

DER

STAN

DIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

WIT

H P

SYCH

OSI

S

HAN

DO

UT

1G: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

1

PAG

E 01

Page 187: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION ONE: UNDERSTANDING THE PATIENT WITH PSYCHOSIS

EAR - SKILLS:

EXPLORE

Symptoms, Experience, Ideas, Feelings:

"How are you in yourself?"

"How does it make you feel?"

"How do you cope with it when it happens?"

"What’s your understanding of that?’

"How are things at home?"

Worries, Concerns

"What are you worried about?"

Expectations

"What were you wanting to talk about today?"

Avoid leading questions and assumptions!

LISTEN ACTIVELY

Skills that facilitate the patient to say more

Wait:• Give patient time to think

before answering

• Allow patient to complete statements without interruption

Non-verbals:• posture, gaze, nodding

Watch for cues:• echo

Summarize periodically, invite patient to revise

"Can I check that I have understood? What you have told me is…"

"Can I just summarize so far?"

"Have I got that right?"

RESPOND

Specific follow-up questions (depends on topic)

VALIDATION

If patient is expressing or reporting difficulties: Acknowledge patients’ feelings, concerns BUT not empty empathy (“I understand”, “That must be very difficult”)

"You seem (frustrated, worried, sad)……."

"It sounds like that is very hard/distressing etc……"

If patient is expressing, reporting positives:

Reinforce how the patient manages and positive steps they have taken

"It sounds like you are dealing with it very well…"

"I can see you are feeling pleased with how things are…"

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 51

Cho

ose

two

of t

he E

AR

-ski

lls y

ou t

hink

wou

ld b

enefi

t yo

ur p

ract

ice

this

wee

k.

1. 2. How

impo

rtan

t is

it t

o yo

u to

use

thi

s in

you

r pr

actic

e in

thi

s w

eek?

How

con

fiden

t ar

e yo

u th

at y

ou w

ill u

se it

in y

our

prac

tice

this

wee

k?

HAN

DO

UT

1G: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

1

PAG

E 02

NO

T IM

PO

RTA

NT

AT A

LL

NO

T C

ON

FID

ENT

AT A

LL

EX

TREM

ELY

IMP

OR

TAN

T

EX

TREM

ELY

CO

NFI

DEN

T

15

10

15

10

ACTI

ON

PLA

NN

ING

FR

AM

EWO

RK

:EA

R -

SKIL

LS:

SESS

ION

4: S

HA

RED

DEC

ISIO

N M

AKI

NG

Invo

lvin

g pa

tien

ts in

dec

isio

nsN

egot

iati

on s

kills

SESS

ION

3: E

MP

OW

ERIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

Age

nda

Sett

ing

Exp

lain

ing

Psy

chos

is

SESS

ION

2: T

ECH

NIQ

UES

FO

R W

OR

KIN

G W

ITH

SYM

PTO

MS

Res

pond

ing

to p

osit

ive

sym

ptom

sR

efra

min

g ne

gati

ve s

ympt

oms

SESS

ION

1: U

ND

ERST

AN

DIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

WIT

H P

SYC

HO

SIS

Exp

erie

ncin

g P

sych

osis

EAR

: Exp

lore

Lis

ten

Act

ivel

y R

espo

nd

EXPL

OR

E

Sym

ptom

s, E

xper

ienc

e,

Idea

s, F

eelin

gs:

"How

are

you

in y

ours

elf?

"

"How

doe

s it

mak

e yo

u fe

el?"

"How

do

you

cope

wit

h it

w

hen

it h

appe

ns?"

"Wha

t’s

your

un

ders

tand

ing

of t

hat?

"How

are

thi

ngs

at h

ome?

"

Wor

ries

, Con

cern

s

"Wha

t ar

e yo

u w

orri

ed

abou

t?"

Expe

ctat

ions

"Wha

t w

ere

you

wan

ting

to

tal

k ab

out

toda

y?"

Avo

id le

adin

g qu

esti

ons

and

assu

mpt

ions

!

LIST

EN A

CTI

VEL

Y

Skill

s th

at fa

cilit

ate

the

pati

ent t

o sa

y m

ore

Wai

t:•

Giv

e pa

tien

t tim

e to

th

ink

befo

re a

nsw

erin

g

• A

llow

pat

ient

to

com

plet

e st

atem

ents

w

itho

ut in

terr

upti

on

Non

-ver

bals

:•

post

ure,

gaz

e, n

oddi

ng

Wat

ch fo

r cu

es:

• ec

ho

Sum

mar

ize

peri

odic

ally

, in

vite

pat

ient

to r

evis

e

"Can

I ch

eck

that

I ha

ve

unde

rsto

od?

Wha

t yo

u ha

ve t

old

me

is…

"

"Can

I ju

st s

umm

ariz

e so

fa

r?"

"Hav

e I g

ot t

hat

righ

t?"

RES

PO

ND

Spec

ific

follo

w-u

p qu

esti

ons

(dep

ends

on

topi

c)

VALI

DAT

ION

If pa

tient

is e

xpre

ssin

g or

re

port

ing

diffi

culti

es:

Ack

now

ledg

e pa

tient

s’

feel

ings

, con

cern

s B

UT

not e

mpt

y em

path

y (“

I un

ders

tand

”, “T

hat m

ust

be v

ery

diffi

cult”

)

"You

see

m (

frus

trat

ed,

wor

ried

, sad

)……

."

"It

soun

ds li

ke t

hat

is v

ery

hard

/dis

tres

sing

etc

……

"

If p

atie

nt is

exp

ress

ing,

re

port

ing

posi

tives

:

Rei

nfor

ce h

ow th

e pa

tien

t man

ages

and

po

sitiv

e st

eps

they

hav

e ta

ken

"It

soun

ds li

ke y

ou a

re

deal

ing

wit

h it

ver

y w

ell…

"

"I c

an s

ee y

ou a

re fe

elin

g pl

ease

d w

ith

how

thi

ngs

are…

"

COM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N S

KILL

S IN

PSY

CHO

SIS

TRAI

NIN

G P

ROG

RAM

ME

– SE

SSIO

N 1

: UN

DER

STAN

DIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

WIT

H P

SYCH

OSI

S

HAN

DO

UT

1G: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

1

PAG

E 01

Page 188: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

ACTION PLANNING

Choose two of the EAR-skills you think would benefit your practice this week.

1.

2.

How important is it to you to use this in your practice in this week?

How confident are you that you will use it in your practice this week?

1

NOT IMPORTANT AT ALL EXTREMELY IMPORTANT

5 10

1

NOT CONFIDENT AT ALL EXTREMELY CONFIDENT

5 10

PAGE 52 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 189: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 2

Techniques for working with symptoms

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 53

Page 190: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 54 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 191: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SUMMARY

The first half of this session focuses on working with delusional beliefs. Participants learn

techniques for exploring and debating these beliefs and practise using them in a paired

role-play.

The second half focuses on working with voices. The participants are taught an approach

to elicit beliefs about voices, which they practise in paired role-play.

Following this, participants discuss issues arising when working with patients with

negative symptoms, reframing negative symptoms as protective and addressing the

challenge of amotivation through goal-setting.

LEARNING OUTCOMES Learn and practise new techniques for responding to positive symptoms and working with negative symptoms

METHODS Didactic teaching; group discussion; paired role-play

MATERIALS PowerPoint presentation, flipchart; teaching aids: role-play scenarios; handout: skills booklet

OTHERS’ INVOLVEMENT No actors involved (role-plays in pairs)

TIMING 3 hours

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 55

Page 192: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TIMETABLE AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEME

15 mins Slide 2: Feedback on applying skills from session 1 Group discussion

1-2 IMPLEMENT-ING SKILLS

5 mins Slide 3: Focus of session 2 Didactic teaching/ Skills

3 INTRO-DUCTION

5 mins Slide 4: Introduction to theme

Slide 5: Function of psychiatric consultation?

Slide 6: Engagement, Assessment, Formulation

Slide 7: Facilitating Engagement

Didactic teaching/ Skills

4-7

15 mins Slide 8: Discussion: how to talk about strong beliefs

Slide 9: Rationale for discussing strong beliefs

Slide 10: Explore strong beliefs

Slide 11: Rationale & tips for exploring patient’s story

Slide 12: Helpful phrases for exploring the story

Slide 13: Showing interest and being non-critical

Slide 14: Debate strong beliefs

Slide 15: Opening & closing a session on strong beliefs

Slide 16: Discussion: how to respond to patient

Slide 17: Suggested responses

Slide 18: EAR table

Didactic teaching/ Skills

8-17 WORKING WITH POSITIVE SYMPTOMS: DELUSIONS

30mins Slide 19: Practise exploring patient’s strong belief Role-play 19

Teaching aid I

10 mins Feedback to group Feedback 19

10 mins Break 20

10 mins Slide 21: Working with voices: goals

Slide 22-23: Tips for exploring beliefs about voices

Slide 24: Rationale for using checklist

Didactic teaching/ Skills

21-24 WORKING WITH POSITIVE SYMPTOMS: DELUSIONS

30 mins Slide 25: Practise skills for eliciting beliefs about voices

Role-play 25

Teaching aid II

10 mins Feedback to group Feedback 25

PAGE 56 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 193: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES

Session slides available on TEMPO DVD

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEME

10mins Slide 26: Working with negative symptoms

Slide 27: Strategies for dealing with amotivation

Slide 28: Strategies for goal setting

Slide 29: SMART goals

Slide 30: Re- conceptualising negative symptoms

Slide 31: EAR table

Didactic teaching/ group discussion

30-31 WORKING WITH NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS

25 mins Slide 32: Practise skills for setting SMART goals 32

5 mins Feedback to group 32 ACTION PLANNING & FEEDBACK

5 mins Slide 32 and 33:

Hand out skills booklet

Action planning

Action planning

Hand out 2a: booklet

3hrs End.

TEMPO  

Session  2  Techniques  for  working  with  

symptoms  

Individualised  feedback  

 Review  and  reflect  on  your  communica<on    

Session  4:  Shared  Decision  Making  

Involving  pa<ents  in  decisions   Nego<a<on  skills  

Session  3:  Empowering  the  pa<ent  

Agenda  SeNng   Explaining  Psychosis  

Session  2:  Techniques  for  working  with  symptoms  

Responding  to  posi<ve  symptoms   Reframing  nega<ve  symptoms  

Session  1:  Understanding  the  pa<ent  with  psychosis  

Experiencing  Psychosis   EAR:  Explore  Listen  Ac<vely  Respond    

Ac<on  planning  -­‐  recap  

• What  2  skills  did  you  try?  • What  success  did  you  enjoy?  

• What  challenges  arose?  

Introduc<on  

•  CBT  is  effec<ve  for  treatment  of  psychosis  •  CBT  session:  50  minutes  over  the  course  of  mul<ple  weeks  but  psychiatrists  only  have  approx.  15  minutes  

•  However,  some  of  the  techniques  are  s<ll  very  useful  in  psychiatric  prac<ce  

• Work  with  pa<ents  along  side  other  mental  health  professionals  

Slide 1

Slide 3

Slide 2

Slide 4

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 57

Page 194: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

Introduc<on  

• What  is  the  func<on  of  an  outpa<ent  psychiatric  consulta<on?  

Facilita<ng  pa<ent  engagement  

•  Work  on  building  up  a  therapeu<c  rela<onship  •  Therapeu<c  rela<onship    Engagement    Adherence      •  Develop  therapeu<c  rela<onship:  

– Show  that  you’re  interested  –  in  a  non-­‐cri<cal  way  – Not  about  right  or  wrong  – Pa<ent  to  feel  listened  to  

•  You’re  the  expert  but  pa<ent  is  expert  in  their  own  life    – work  alongside  each  other  and  show  understanding  and  respect  

How  to  talk  about  strong  beliefs  

•  Previous  research  shows:  pa<ents  are  talking  about  something  really  important  to  them  and  psychiatrist  responds  with  e.g.  are  you  taking  your  meds?  

   Psychiatrists  tend  to  avoid  the  discussion  because  it  may  lead  to  disagreement  

•  Focus  on  listening,  understanding,  exploring,  i.e.  working  on  the  rela<onship!  

Explore  pa<ent’s  story  

•  Draw  out  the  person’s  story  surrounding  the  belief  – 3  objec<ves:  

•  You  know  the  story  •  Pa<ents  knows  you  know  the  story  •  Pa<ent  understands  the  story  and  begins  to  process  it    

– Process  over  course  of  2  or  3  sessions    – Go  back  to  why  they  came  to  conclusions  (belief)  and  what  reinforced  it  

– Exploring  and  listening  to  story  helps  building  up  rapport                    and  pa<ent  engagement  

Introduc<on  

Essen<al  tasks  in  any  consulta<on:  •  Engagement  

•  Assessment  

•  Formula<on  

Posi<ve  symptoms:    Working  with  strong  beliefs  

•  How  do  you  feel  about  discussing  strong  beliefs  with  your  pa<ents?  

•  How  do  you  talk  to  the  pa<ent  about  it?  

Explore  strong  beliefs  

•  Ini<al  assessment    (History  of  Presen<ng  Complaint)    

– trace  origins  of  belief:  ‘listen  to  their  story’  – build  a  picture  of  prodromal  period  •  iden<fy  significant  life  events  &  circumstances  •  iden<fy  relevant  percep<ons  &  thoughts  

– explore  content  of  belief  

Helpful  phrases  What  was  

happening  at  the  <me?  When  did  it  

start?  

What  made  you  believe  this  at  the  

<me?  

I’d  like  to  understand  why  you  believe  this…  

It’s  given  me  some  understanding  of  

how  you’ve  become  concerned  

Slide 5

Slide 7

Slide 9

Slide 11

Slide 6

Slide 8

Slide 10

Slide 12

PAGE 58 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 195: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Tips  

•  Get  across  that  you’re  interested.  Not  to  demonstrate  they’re  wrong.  Not  in  a  cri<cal  way,  in  an  exploratory  way.  –   I’d  like  to  understand  why  you  believe  this….I’m  really  interested.    

– Can  you  keep  going  with  the  story?  It’s  giving  me  some  understanding  of  how  you’ve  become  concerned.  

•  If  pa<ent  is  becoming  distressed,  step  back  –   We  can  leave  this  for  now,  and  come  back  to  it.  

Opening  and  closing  session  

•  Opening  session:  –  trace  origins  &  prodrome  –  some<mes  this  is  only  in  notes!  – explore  current  concerns  – empathise/discuss  

•  Termina<ng  sessions    – agree  to  con<nue  discussion  –  next  <me  

– agree  to  set  up  opportunity  for  further  discussions  –  It’s  been  very  helpful  to  discuss  this  and  we  will  con<nue  our  discussion  

How  do  you  respond…  

•  Suggested  responses:  –  Whether  I  believe  you  or  not,  it’s  important  to  talk  about  

this.  What  you’ve  told  me  at  the  moment,  I’m  not  fully  convinced.  I  think  we  need  to  talk  about  this  more.  I  think  I  can  see  how  you  came  to  believe  this.  Is  there  anything  you  can  do  over  the  next  few  months  that  would  help  us  in  this  discussion?  

–  Can  we  set  this  aside  for  the  moment  and  go  back  a  bit  to  help  me  understand?  

Delusions  Role-­‐play  

•  In  pairs  assign  psychiatrist  and  pa<ent  role  – Pa<ent  describes  current  concern  – Psychiatrist  draws  out  their  story  using  prompts  and  ques<ons  • by  exploring  how  strong  beliefs  began    • how  they  have  developed  • how  they  affect  them  now  

– Agree  a  way  forward  •  Now  swap  roles…  

Debate  strong  beliefs  

•  Establish  nature  of  evidence  for  the  belief  – discuss  significant  others’  opinions  • Why  do  you  think  others  think  that..    

– elicit  alterna<ves:  prompt  only  if  necessary    •  If  someone  said  that  to  you,  how  would  you  respond?  • What  about...?  do  you  think  just  possibly..?  • Explore  doubts  about  belief:  even  the  <niest  wink  of  doubt  is  extremely  helpful  in  the  future  

– explora<on/inves<ga<on • Simple  tasks  –  find  informa<on  or  test  out  (e.g.  use  audio-­‐recorder  to  test  if  voices  are  really  there)  

How  do  you  respond…  

• When  the  pa<ent  asks:  ‘You  don’t  believe  me  –do  you?’  

Posi<ve  symptoms:  EAR  skills  EAR-­‐skills   Responding  to  posi3ve  symptoms:  

strong  beliefs  

Explore   Explore:  pa<ent’s  story  of  belief  and  individuality  of  percep<on  &  origin  Discuss  phenomena  

Listen  Ac<vely   Show  understanding  &  interest  Check  understanding    

Respond   Normalize  most  people…  Debate  coping  

Break  

Slide 13

Slide 15

Slide 17

Slide 19

Slide 14

Slide 16

Slide 18

Slide 20

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 59

Page 196: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

Working  with  voices  

•  Goal:  – Pa<ent  understand  that  you  understand  they  are  hearing  voices    

– Ideally,  the  long-­‐term  aim  is  to  develop  pa<ent  awareness  that  voices  may  be  something  to  do  with  them.  This  is  key  for  interven<ons,  medica<on,  coping  strategies,  which  are  not  relevant  if  nothing  to  do  with  them.  

Debate  voices    

• Weigh  pros  &  cons  of  what  voices  say:  ‘you’re  bad’    –  Why  do  you  think  they’re  saying  that?  Is  there  any  truth  to  that?  Do  

you  think  you’re  that  bad?  What  is  it  that’s  bad?  What  are  the  good  things  about  you?  

–  Important  for  pa<ent  to  draw  conclusion,  they’re  ok  

•  Normalising  explana<ons:  –  Sleep  depriva<on  and  other  stressful  circumstances:  e.g.  bereavement,  

hostages,  PTSD,  ‘inner  speech’,  dreaming    

–  Understand  hallucina<ons  –  mind  hears  things,  not  coming  through  the  ears,  but  coming  from  your  mind,  voice  area  in  brain  ac<ve  (broca’s  area).  

Voices  Role-­‐play  

•  In  pairs  assign  psychiatrist  and  pa<ent  role.  – Pa<ent  describes  voices  – Psychiatrist    • explores  beliefs  about  voices  

– Agree  a  way  forward  •  Now  swap  roles…  

How  to  deal  with  amo<va<on  

•  Help  pa<ent  get  back  into  life  step  by  step  •  Build  up  resilience  &  empowerment!  

–  You  can’t  push  pa6ents  out  off  nega6ve  symptoms  -­‐  the  more  pressure,  the  worse  it  gets!!  

–  Broken  leg  analogy:  psychological  healing  period  required  –  ‘Relax  –  take  some  <me  off!’  

– When  pa<ent  feels  ready,  help  geNng  him/her  back  in  to  life  –  step  by  step  

–  Help  them  get  back  in  control  again!  

Explore  voices    

•  Discuss  the  experience:       What  is  it  like?  Someone  speaking  to  you  like  I’m  doing  now..  maybe  louder  or  whispered  

•  Explore  individuality  of  percep<on  

  Can  anybody  else  hear  what  is  said?’  ‘not  parents,  friends,  etc?  

•  Discover  beliefs  about  origin:  

  Why  do  you  think  others  can’t  they  hear  them?  •  Debate  individual  beliefs  about  origin  of  voices  

•  ‘But  that’s  the  way  God  is..’;  use  techniques  for  delusions,  if  appropriate  

•  explore  doubts:  ‘I’m  not  sure  how  they  come..’  

   

Purpose  of  this  approach  

•  Help  pa<ent  understand  the  voices  •  Clarify  voices  between  you  and  pa<ent    shared  understanding  of  voices  

•  Help  pa<ent  recognise:  Not  the  voices  are  the  problem  –  but  what  they’re  doing  to  you  

Working  with  nega<ve  symptoms  

•  How  do  you  recognise  pa<ent  with  nega<ve  symptoms?  – Through  conversa<on    

•  Key  nega<ve  symptoms:  lack  of  communica<on  &  mo<va<on  

Realis<c  and  graduated  goal  seNng  

•  Small  steps,  e.g.  ‘Get  up  twice  a  day  to  make  yourself  a  cup  of  tea’-­‐  what  would  it  be  like  to  go  out?    try  it  out!  

•  Have  a  plan  to  do  things  gradually    the  earlier  psychiatrists  can  do  this  work  the  bemer  

•  Set  a  short-­‐term  goal  (What  did  you  used  to  do  that  you  might  like  to  do?)  

•  Set  a  long-­‐term  goal  (3-­‐5  years)  

•  All  goals  have  to  come  from  the  pa3ent!  

Slide 21

Slide 23

Slide 25

Slide 27

Slide 22

Slide 24

Slide 26

Slide 28

PAGE 60 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 197: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SMART  goals  

•  Collabora<vely  select  ini<al  goal  (SMART):  – Specific    – Measurable  – Achievable  – Realis<c  – Timely  

Nega<ve  symptoms:  EAR  skills  EAR-­‐skills   Reframing  nega3ve  symptoms  

Explore   Explore  short  &  long  term  goals  

Listen  Ac<vely   Summarize  periodically  

Respond   Take  the  pressure  off  Collaboratively  set  SMART  goals  

Skills  booklet  

• Content:  – Learning  points,  helpful  phrases,  ac<on  plan,  EAR-­‐table  

Nega<ve  symptoms  

•  Re-­‐conceptualise  nega<ve  symptoms:      – As  protec<ve  against  stress  and  posi<ve  symptoms    

Nega<ve  symptoms  Role-­‐play  

•  Describe  ra<onale  – Protec<ve  nature  of  nega<ve  symptoms  

– Aim  for  pa<ent  to  feel  bemer  able  to  cope,  in  control  and  not  under  pressure  

•  Set  a  long-­‐term  goal  (3-­‐5  years)  

•  Collabora<vely  select  ini<al  goal  (SMART)    

Ac<on  planning  •  Choose  two  of  the  specific  skills  for  symptoms  you  think  

would  benefit  your  prac<ce  this  week.  

1.  2.  How  important  is  it  to  you  to  use  this  in  your  prac<ce  in  the  next  week?  

                               

How  confident  are  you  that  you  will  use  it  in  your  prac<ce  in  the  next  week?  

Not  important  at  all   Extremely  important  

0   5   10  

Not  confident  at  all   Extremely  confident  

0   5   10  

Slide 29

Slide 31

Slide 33

Slide 30

Slide 32

Slide 34

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 61

Page 198: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID I: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 2 – STRONG BELIEFS ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

Ensure that the room provides enough space for all pairs to role-play.

Allow 30 minutes for the role-play (15 minutes for each turn) and

10 minutes for debriefing in the group.

PROCEDURE

1. The group works in pairs.

2. Instruct the participants to assign the role of patient and

psychiatrist. Ask the participant playing the patient to ‘play’ one

of their own patients who they have seen recently. The patient

presents a particular delusional belief. Instruct the participant who

plays the psychiatrist to practise exploring the belief:

— by exploring how strong beliefs began

— how they have developed

— how they affect them now

3. All pairs play at the same time and not in front of the whole group.

4. While they are playing, move around the room between pairs,

listening and helping out with useful words and phrases to move

the process along.

5. Allow 10 minutes for the each turn.

6. At the end of each turn, ask the ‘psychiatrist’ to repeat what was said – without

interpretation. Then the ‘patient’ should give feedback on how they felt about the

conversation and about the psychiatrist’s’ communication. (allow 5 minutes). Then

ask the pairs to swop roles (and run another 10 minutes role-play followed by

5 minute feedback).

7. Following this (i.e. after 30minutes), ask all participants to feedback their experience

to the group. Firstly, ask what it was like to be the patient, what psychiatrist behaviour

they perceived as reassuring. Secondly, ask for feedback on the ‘psychiatrist’s role’

regarding the use of the techniques and the information elicited.

AIM

Participants to

practise eliciting the

patient’s story

Raise awareness of

the kind and quantity

of information that

can be elicited by

using the techniques

PAGE 62 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 199: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID II: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 2 – VOICES ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

Ensure that the room provides enough space for all pairs to role-play.

Allow 30 minutes for the role-play (15 minutes for each turn) and

10 minutes for debriefing in the group.

PROCEDURE

1. The group works in pairs.

2. Instruct the participants to assign the role of patient and

psychiatrist. Ask the participant playing the patient to ‘play’ one

of their own patients who they have seen recently and who is

hearing voices. Instruct the participant who plays the psychiatrist

to practise using the checklist for eliciting beliefs about voices

— Explore beliefs about voices and use checklist

— Discuss content

— Agree a way forward

3. All pairs play at the same time and not in front of the whole group.

4. While they are playing, move around the room between pairs,

listening and helping out with useful words and phrases to move

the process along.

5. Allow 10 minutes for the each turn.

6. At the end of each turn, ask the ‘psychiatrist’ to repeat what was said – without

interpretation. Then the ‘patient’ should give feedback on how they felt about the

conversation and about the psychiatrist’s’ communication (allow 5 minutes). Then

ask the pairs to swop roles (and run another 10 minutes role-play followed by

5 minute feedback).

7. Following this (i.e. after 30 minutes), ask all participants to feedback their experience

to the group. Firstly, ask what it was like to be the patient, what psychiatrist

behaviour they perceived as positive. Secondly, ask for feedback of the ‘psychiatrist’s

role’ regarding the use of the techniques and the information elicited.

AIM

Participants to practise

eliciting the patient’s

belief about voices

Raise awareness of

the kind and quantity

of information that

can be elicited using

the techniques

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 63

Page 200: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID III: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 2 – NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

Ensure that the room provides enough space for all pairs to role-play.

Allow 30 minutes for the role-play (15 minutes for each turn) and 10

minutes for debriefing in the group.

PROCEDURE

1. The group works in pairs. Instruct the participants to assign the

role of patient and psychiatrist. Ask the participant playing the

patient to ‘play’ one of their own patients who they have seen

recently and who are suffering from negative symptoms. Instruct

the participant who plays the psychiatrist to practise reframing

negative symptoms as protective and collaboratively setting an

achievable goal, no matter how small, with the patient

— Describe rationale: protective nature of negative symptoms–

aim therefore to feel better able to cope, in control and not

under pressure

— Set one long-term goal (3-5 years) and at least one short-term goal

— The goal HAS to come from the patient

2. All pairs play at the same time and not in front of the whole group.

3. While they are playing, move around the room between pairs, listening and helping

out with useful words and phrases to move the process along.

4. Allow 10 minutes for the each turn.

5. At the end of each turn, ask the ‘psychiatrist’ to repeat what was said – without

interpretation. Then the ‘patient’ should give feedback on how they felt about the

conversation and about the psychiatrist’s’ communication (allow 5 minutes). Then ask

the pairs to swop roles (and run another 10 minutes role-play followed by 5 minute

feedback).

6. Following this (i.e. after 30 minutes), ask all participants to feedback their experience

to the group. Firstly, ask what it was like to be the patient, what psychiatrist

behaviour they perceived as positive. Secondly, ask for feedback of the ‘psychiatrist’s

role’ regarding the use of the techniques and the information elicited.

AIM

Participants to

practise working with

amotivation - take the

pressure off

Practise collaboratively

setting a gradual but

realistic goal with the

patient

PAGE 64 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 201: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1A: BOOKLET SESSION 2

COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN PSYCHOSIS TRAINING

SESSION 2: TECHNIQUES FOR WORKING WITH SYMPTOMS

POSITIVE SYMPTOMS

1. DRAW OUT THE PERSON’S STORY

What is happening? When did it start? What was happening when this started to happen?

Get across that you’re interested. Not to demonstrate they’re wrong. Not in a critical way,

in an exploratory way. ‘I’d like to understand why you believe this….I’m really interested”.

“Can you keep going with the story? It’s giving me some understanding of how you’ve

become concerned”.

If patient is becoming distressed, step back “we can leave this for now, and come

back to it”.

GOT THE STORY – NOW WHAT?

Closing down the conversation:

The time spent talking/engaging – that in itself is a goal.

“It’s been extremely useful for us to invest this time in this way and for me to hear what

your concerns are, how they developed, and there is a lot to talk about, I’d like if we

could continue the next time we meet. Are there any particular things we need to check

before we finish today?”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 65

POSI

TIVE

SYM

PTO

MS

1. D

RA

W O

UT

THE

PER

SON

’S S

TOR

Y

Wh

at is

hap

pen

ing

? W

hen

did

it s

tart

? W

hat

was

hap

pen

ing

w

hen

th

is s

tart

ed t

o h

app

en?

Get

acr

oss

that

you

’re in

tere

sted

. Not

to

dem

onst

rate

the

y’re

wro

ng.

Not

in a

crit

ical

way

, in

an e

xplo

rato

ry w

ay. ‘

I’d li

ke t

o un

ders

tand

why

you

belie

ve t

his…

.I’m

rea

lly in

tere

sted

”. “

Can

you

kee

p go

ing

with

the

sto

ry?

It’s

givi

ng m

e so

me

unde

rsta

ndin

g of

how

you

’ve

beco

me

conc

erne

d”.

If pa

tient

is b

ecom

ing

dist

ress

ed, s

tep

back

“w

e ca

n le

ave

this

for

now

,

and

com

e ba

ck t

o it”

.

GO

T TH

E ST

OR

Y –

NO

W W

HAT

?

Clo

sing

dow

n th

e co

nver

satio

n:

The

time

spen

t ta

lkin

g/e

ngag

ing

– th

at in

itse

lf is

a g

oal.

“It’

s be

en e

xtre

mel

y us

eful

for

us

to in

vest

thi

s tim

e in

thi

s w

ay a

nd f

or m

e

to h

ear

wha

t yo

ur c

once

rns

are,

how

the

y de

velo

ped,

and

the

re is

a lo

t to

talk

abo

ut, I

’d li

ke if

we

coul

d co

ntin

ue t

he n

ext

time

we

mee

t. A

re t

here

any

part

icul

ar t

hing

s w

e ne

ed t

o ch

eck

befo

re w

e fin

ish

toda

y?”

Pati

ent

asks

: “D

o y

ou

bel

ieve

me?

Whe

ther

I be

lieve

you

or

not,

it’s

impo

rtan

t to

tal

k ab

out

this

. Wha

t

you’

ve t

old

me

at t

he m

omen

t, I’

m n

ot f

ully

con

vinc

ed. I

thi

nk w

e ne

ed

to t

alk

abou

t th

is m

ore.

I th

ink

I can

see

how

you

cam

e to

bel

ieve

thi

s. Is

ther

e an

ythi

ng y

ou c

an d

o ov

er t

he n

ext

few

mon

ths

that

wou

ld h

elp

us

in t

his

disc

ussi

on?

Avo

id n

egat

ive

fram

ing

‘bu

t I’m

afr

aid

we

have

to

wra

p

up f

or t

oday

’ – f

ram

e po

sitiv

ely

“thi

s is

has

bee

n re

ally

hel

pful

an

d w

hen

you

com

e ba

ck t

he n

ext

time”

Can

we

set

this

asi

de f

or t

he m

omen

t an

d go

bac

k a

bit

to h

elp

me

unde

rsta

nd?

ELIC

ITIN

G B

ELIE

FS A

BOU

T VO

ICES

:

Go

al =

the

y un

ders

tand

tha

t yo

u un

ders

tand

the

y ar

e he

arin

g vo

ices

.

Idea

lly, d

evel

op s

ome

awar

enes

s th

at t

hey

may

be

som

ethi

ng t

o do

with

them

. Thi

s is

key

for

inte

rven

tions

, med

icat

ion,

cop

ing

stra

tegi

es, w

hich

are

not

rele

vant

if t

he v

oice

s ha

ve n

othi

ng t

o do

with

the

m.

HAN

DO

UT

2A: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

2

PAG

E 01

COM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N S

KILL

S IN

PSY

CHO

SIS

TRAI

NIN

G –

SES

SIO

N 2

: TEC

HN

IQU

ES F

OR

WO

RKIN

G W

ITH

SYM

PTO

MS

Page 202: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Patient asks: “Do you believe me?”

Whether I believe you or not, it’s important to talk about this. What you’ve told me at

the moment, I’m not fully convinced. I think we need to talk about this more. I think I can

see how you came to believe this. Is there anything you can do over the next few months

that would help us in this discussion? Avoid negative framing ‘but I’m afraid we have to

wrap up for today’ – frame positively “this is has been really helpful and when you come

back the next time”

Can we set this aside for the moment and go back a bit to help me understand?

ELICITING BELIEFS ABOUT VOICES:

Goal = they understand that you understand they are hearing voices. Ideally, develop

some awareness that they may be something to do with them. This is key for

interventions, medication, coping strategies, which are not relevant if the voices have

nothing to do with them.

Socratic dialogue: discuss phenomena:

‘someone speaking to you like I’m doing now? maybe louder or whispered’

Explore individuality of perception: ‘can anybody else hear what is said?’ ‘not parents,

friends, etc?’

Discover beliefs about origin: ‘why do you think others can’t hear them?’

Debate individual beliefs about origin of voices: ‘But that’s the way God is..’;

use techniques for delusions, if appropriate

Explore doubts: ‘I’m not sure where they come from’

Normalising alternatives: Sleep deprivation and other stressful circumstances: e.g.

bereavement, hostages, dreaming, PTSD. ‘Like dreaming when you’re awake’.

Understand hallucinations – mind hears things, not coming through the ears, but coming

from your mind, voice area in brain active (Broca’s area).

Not the voices that are the problem – what they’re doing to you.

PAGE 66 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Socr

atic

dia

log

ue

: dis

cuss

phe

nom

ena:

‘som

eone

spe

akin

g to

you

like

I’m

doi

ng n

ow?

may

be lo

uder

or

whi

sper

ed’

Exp

lore

indi

vidu

ality

of

perc

eptio

n: ‘c

an a

nybo

dy e

lse

hear

wha

t is

sai

d?’

‘not

par

ents

, frie

nds,

etc

?’

Dis

cove

r be

liefs

abo

ut o

rigin

: ‘w

hy d

o yo

u th

ink

othe

rs c

an’t

hea

r th

em?’

Deb

ate

indi

vidu

al b

elie

fs a

bout

orig

in o

f vo

ices

: ‘Bu

t th

at’s

the

way

God

is..’

; use

tec

hniq

ues

for

delu

sion

s, if

app

ropr

iate

Exp

lore

dou

bts:

‘I’m

not

sur

e w

here

the

y co

me

from

Nor

mal

isin

g al

tern

ativ

es: S

leep

dep

rivat

ion

and

othe

r st

ress

ful

circ

umst

ance

s: e

.g. b

erea

vem

ent,

hos

tage

s, d

ream

ing,

PTS

D. ‘

Like

drea

min

g w

hen

you’

re a

wak

e’.

Und

erst

and

hallu

cina

tions

– m

ind

hear

s th

ings

, not

com

ing

thro

ugh

the

ears

, but

com

ing

from

you

r m

ind,

voi

ce a

rea

in b

rain

act

ive

(Bro

ca’s

are

a).

Not

the

voi

ces

that

are

the

pro

blem

– w

hat

they

’re d

oing

to

you.

Wei

gh

pro

s &

co

ns

of w

hat

voic

es s

ay.

Why

do

you

thin

k th

ey’re

say

ing

that

? Is

the

re a

ny t

ruth

to

that

? D

o yo

u

thin

k yo

u’re

tha

t ba

d? W

hat

is it

tha

t’s

bad?

Wha

t ar

e th

e go

od t

hing

s

abou

t yo

u?

Plus

es a

nd m

inus

es t

o ev

eryo

ne –

wha

t th

e vo

ices

are

say

ing

is a

bit

one-

side

d. H

elp

patie

nt t

o re

cogn

ise

“I’m

doi

ng m

y be

st”.

HO

W T

O A

PPLY

TH

E EA

R-S

KILL

S

EAR

-SKI

LLS

RES

PO

ND

ING

TO

PO

SITI

VE

SYM

PTO

MS:

Exp

lore

• E

xplo

re p

atie

nt’s

sto

ry o

f bel

ief /

voic

es

• So

crac

tic

dial

ogue

: dis

cuss

phe

nom

ena

• E

xplo

re in

divi

dual

ity

of p

erce

ptio

n &

ori

gin

List

en A

ctiv

ely

• Sh

ow u

nder

stan

ding

& in

tere

st

• A

ckno

wle

dge

dist

ress

ing

expe

rien

ce

• C

heck

und

erst

andi

ng o

f voi

ces

Res

pond

• R

eass

ure:

nor

mal

ise

(mos

t peo

ple…

)

• W

eigh

pro

s &

con

s

• D

ebat

e

HAN

DO

UT

2A: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

2

PAG

E 02

Page 203: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Weigh pros & cons of what voices say.

Why do you think they’re saying that? Is there any truth to that? Do you think you’re that

bad? What is it that’s bad? What are the good things about you?

Pluses and minuses to everyone – what the voices are saying is a bit one-sided. Help

patient to recognise “I’m doing my best”.

HOW TO APPLY THE EAR-SKILLS

EAR-SKILLS RESPONDING TO POSITIVE SYMPTOMS:

Explore • Explore patient’s story of belief /voices

• Socractic dialogue: discuss phenomena

• Explore individuality of perception & origin

Listen Actively • Show understanding & interest

• Acknowledge distressing experience

• Check understanding of voices

Respond • Reassure: normalise (most people…)

• Weigh pros & cons

• Debate

NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS:

Protective nature of negative symptoms

Goal = to feel better able to cope, in control and not under pressure. Take it easy. “Relax,

don’t do too much for the next while”. Pushing too hard makes people demoralised.

Set at least one long-term goal (3-5 years): has to come from patient

Set a short-term goal: has to come from patient (What did you used to do that you might

like to do?)

Collaboratively select initial goal (SMART)

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 67

Socr

atic

dia

log

ue

: dis

cuss

phe

nom

ena:

‘som

eone

spe

akin

g to

you

like

I’m

doi

ng n

ow?

may

be lo

uder

or

whi

sper

ed’

Exp

lore

indi

vidu

ality

of

perc

eptio

n: ‘c

an a

nybo

dy e

lse

hear

wha

t is

sai

d?’

‘not

par

ents

, frie

nds,

etc

?’

Dis

cove

r be

liefs

abo

ut o

rigin

: ‘w

hy d

o yo

u th

ink

othe

rs c

an’t

hea

r th

em?’

Deb

ate

indi

vidu

al b

elie

fs a

bout

orig

in o

f vo

ices

: ‘Bu

t th

at’s

the

way

God

is..’

; use

tec

hniq

ues

for

delu

sion

s, if

app

ropr

iate

Exp

lore

dou

bts:

‘I’m

not

sur

e w

here

the

y co

me

from

Nor

mal

isin

g al

tern

ativ

es: S

leep

dep

rivat

ion

and

othe

r st

ress

ful

circ

umst

ance

s: e

.g. b

erea

vem

ent,

hos

tage

s, d

ream

ing,

PTS

D. ‘

Like

drea

min

g w

hen

you’

re a

wak

e’.

Und

erst

and

hallu

cina

tions

– m

ind

hear

s th

ings

, not

com

ing

thro

ugh

the

ears

, but

com

ing

from

you

r m

ind,

voi

ce a

rea

in b

rain

act

ive

(Bro

ca’s

are

a).

Not

the

voi

ces

that

are

the

pro

blem

– w

hat

they

’re d

oing

to

you.

Wei

gh

pro

s &

co

ns

of w

hat

voic

es s

ay.

Why

do

you

thin

k th

ey’re

say

ing

that

? Is

the

re a

ny t

ruth

to

that

? D

o yo

u

thin

k yo

u’re

tha

t ba

d? W

hat

is it

tha

t’s

bad?

Wha

t ar

e th

e go

od t

hing

s

abou

t yo

u?

Plus

es a

nd m

inus

es t

o ev

eryo

ne –

wha

t th

e vo

ices

are

say

ing

is a

bit

one-

side

d. H

elp

patie

nt t

o re

cogn

ise

“I’m

doi

ng m

y be

st”.

HO

W T

O A

PPLY

TH

E EA

R-S

KILL

S

EAR

-SKI

LLS

RES

PO

ND

ING

TO

PO

SITI

VE

SYM

PTO

MS:

Exp

lore

• E

xplo

re p

atie

nt’s

sto

ry o

f bel

ief /

voic

es

• So

crac

tic

dial

ogue

: dis

cuss

phe

nom

ena

• E

xplo

re in

divi

dual

ity

of p

erce

ptio

n &

ori

gin

List

en A

ctiv

ely

• Sh

ow u

nder

stan

ding

& in

tere

st

• A

ckno

wle

dge

dist

ress

ing

expe

rien

ce

• C

heck

und

erst

andi

ng o

f voi

ces

Res

pond

• R

eass

ure:

nor

mal

ise

(mos

t peo

ple…

)

• W

eigh

pro

s &

con

s

• D

ebat

e

HAN

DO

UT

2A: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

2

PAG

E 02

NEG

ATIV

E SY

MPT

OM

S:

Prot

ectiv

e na

ture

of

nega

tive

sym

ptom

s

Goa

l = t

o fe

el b

ette

r ab

le t

o co

pe, i

n co

ntro

l and

not

und

er p

ress

ure.

Tak

e

it ea

sy. “

Rela

x, d

on’t

do

too

muc

h fo

r th

e ne

xt w

hile

”. P

ushi

ng t

oo h

ard

mak

es p

eopl

e de

mor

alis

ed.

Set

at le

ast

one

long

-ter

m g

oal (

3-5

year

s): h

as t

o co

me

from

pat

ient

Set

a sh

ort-

term

goa

l: ha

s to

com

e fr

om p

atie

nt (

Wha

t di

d yo

u us

ed t

o do

that

you

mig

ht li

ke t

o do

?)

Col

labo

rativ

ely

sele

ct in

itial

goa

l (SM

AR

T)

SMAR

T G

OAL

S:

Spec

ific,

Mea

sura

ble,

Ach

ieva

ble,

Rel

evan

t, T

ime-

boun

d

HO

W T

O A

PPLY

TH

E EA

R-S

KILL

S

EAR

-SKI

LLS

REF

RA

MIN

G N

EGAT

IVE

SYM

PTO

MS:

Exp

lore

• E

xplo

re s

hort

& lo

ng te

rm g

oals

• E

xplo

re fe

elin

gs &

sym

ptom

s

List

en A

ctiv

ely

• A

ckno

wle

dge

feel

ings

& d

istr

ess

• Su

mm

ariz

e pe

riod

ical

ly

Res

pond

• Ta

ke t

he p

ress

ure

off

• C

olla

bora

tive

ly s

et g

oals

• R

einf

orce

pos

itiv

e st

eps

& h

elp

pati

ent t

o

get b

ack

in c

ontr

ol

HAN

DO

UT

2A: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

2

PAG

E 03

Page 204: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SMART GOALS:

Specific, Measurable, Achievable, Relevant, Time-bound

HOW TO APPLY THE EAR-SKILLS

EAR-SKILLS REFRAMING NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS:

Explore • Explore short & long term goals

• Explore feelings & symptoms

Listen Actively • Acknowledge feelings & distress

• Summarize periodically

Respond • Take the pressure off

• Collaboratively set goals

• Reinforce positive steps & help patient to get back in control

PAGE 68 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Cho

ose

two

of t

he a

bove

ski

lls f

or w

orki

ng w

ith p

ositi

ve s

ympt

oms

you

thin

k w

ould

ben

efit

your

pra

ctic

e th

is w

eek.

1. 2. How

impo

rtan

t is

it t

o yo

u to

use

thi

s in

you

r pr

actic

e in

the

nex

t w

eek?

How

con

fiden

t ar

e yo

u th

at y

ou w

ill u

se it

in y

our

prac

tice

in t

he

next

wee

k?

Cho

ose

two

of t

he a

bove

ski

lls f

or w

orki

ng w

ith n

egat

ive

sym

ptom

s

you

thin

k w

ould

ben

efit

your

pra

ctic

e th

is w

eek.

1. 2. How

impo

rtan

t is

it t

o yo

u to

use

thi

s in

you

r pr

actic

e in

the

nex

t w

eek?

How

con

fiden

t ar

e yo

u th

at y

ou w

ill u

se it

in y

our

prac

tice

in t

he

next

wee

k?

HAN

DO

UT

2A: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

2

PAG

E 04

NO

T IM

PO

RTA

NT

AT A

LLN

OT

IMP

OR

TAN

T AT

ALL

NO

T C

ON

FID

ENT

AT A

LLN

OT

CO

NFI

DEN

T AT

ALL

EX

TREM

ELY

IMP

OR

TAN

TE

XTR

EMEL

Y IM

PO

RTA

NT

EX

TREM

ELY

CO

NFI

DEN

TE

XTR

EMEL

Y C

ON

FID

ENT

15

101

510

15

101

510

ACTI

ON

PLA

NN

ING

Page 205: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 3

Empowering the patient

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 69

Cho

ose

two

of t

he a

bove

ski

lls f

or w

orki

ng w

ith p

ositi

ve s

ympt

oms

you

thin

k w

ould

ben

efit

your

pra

ctic

e th

is w

eek.

1. 2. How

impo

rtan

t is

it t

o yo

u to

use

thi

s in

you

r pr

actic

e in

the

nex

t w

eek?

How

con

fiden

t ar

e yo

u th

at y

ou w

ill u

se it

in y

our

prac

tice

in t

he

next

wee

k?

Cho

ose

two

of t

he a

bove

ski

lls f

or w

orki

ng w

ith n

egat

ive

sym

ptom

s

you

thin

k w

ould

ben

efit

your

pra

ctic

e th

is w

eek.

1. 2. How

impo

rtan

t is

it t

o yo

u to

use

thi

s in

you

r pr

actic

e in

the

nex

t w

eek?

How

con

fiden

t ar

e yo

u th

at y

ou w

ill u

se it

in y

our

prac

tice

in t

he

next

wee

k?

HAN

DO

UT

2A: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

2

PAG

E 04

NO

T IM

PO

RTA

NT

AT A

LLN

OT

IMP

OR

TAN

T AT

ALL

NO

T C

ON

FID

ENT

AT A

LLN

OT

CO

NFI

DEN

T AT

ALL

EX

TREM

ELY

IMP

OR

TAN

TE

XTR

EMEL

Y IM

PO

RTA

NT

EX

TREM

ELY

CO

NFI

DEN

TE

XTR

EMEL

Y C

ON

FID

ENT

15

101

510

15

101

510

ACTI

ON

PLA

NN

ING

Page 206: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 70 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 207: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SUMMARY

Session 3 focuses on empowering the patient by involving the patient in setting the

agenda for the consultation and by working on the patient’s understanding of their

illness. The first half of session 3 focuses on agenda setting. Participants practise agenda

setting step 1 and 2 in role-play with simulated patients (professional actors) and receive

video feedback.

The second half focuses on explaining psychosis. The topic is introduced by showing and

discussing video clips of patients asking questions about their illness. Participants practise

explaining aspects of the illness in role-play with actors and receive video-feedback.

LEARNING OUTCOMES Develop and practise skills for agenda

setting and explaining psychosis

METHODS Didactic teaching; group discussion;

working with real consultation

examples; role-play with actors and

video feedback

MATERIALS Power-point presentation; flipchart;

video clips of real consultations;

teaching aids: role-play instructions;

2 video cameras, patient information

material; handout: skills booklet

and ‘how to explain psychosis –

useful phrases’

OTHERS’ INVOLVEMENT 2 professional actors for role-play

TIMING 3 hours

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 71

Page 208: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TIMETABLE AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEME

15 mins Slide 2: Feedback on applying skills from session 2 Group discussion

1-2 IMPLEMENT-ING SKILLS

5 mins Slide 3: Focus of session 3 Didactic teaching/ Skills

3 INTRO-DUCTION

5 mins Slide 4: Priorities of patients & clinicians (supplementary reading Doody 2010)

Slide 5: External context

Didactic teaching

4-5 PATIENT & PSYCHIATR-IST PRIORITIES

10 mins Slide 6: Agenda setting steps

Slide 7: Step1: Elicit patient’s priorities

Slide 8-9: ‘Eliciting patient’s priorities’ clips

Slide 10: Tips for eliciting priorities

Slide 11: Step 2- explain own priorities

Slide 12: Step 3 – negotiate

Slide 13: Step 4 - recap

Slide 14: EAR-table

Didactic teaching/ Skills

Real consultation examples

6-14 AGENDA SETTING

50 mins Slide 15: Practise agenda setting steps 1 and 2 in role-play with actors and video feedback

Role-play with actors & video-feedback

15

Teaching aid I; teaching aid II; handout 3a

Two video cameras and usb cables

10 mins Break 16

10 mins Slide 17: Introduce new theme

Slide 18: Video clip - patient asking about psychosis

Slide 19: How to respond to question

Slide 20: Questions raised by patients

Real consultation examples

Discussion

17-20 EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS

5 mins Slide 21: Explaining psychosis

Slide 22: Useful tips

Slide 23-28: Helpful phrases. Handout 3b

Slide 29: EAR-table

Didactic teaching

21-29

Handout 3b

50 mins Slide 30: Practise explaining psychosis Role-play with actors & video-feedback

30

Teaching aid III & IV; handout 3c

2 video cameras

PAGE 72 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 209: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES

Session slides available on TEMPO DVD

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEME

10 mins Slide 31-32: Patient information material Info tools/ skills

31-32

Hand 3d (on DVD)

EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS

5 mins Feedback (what have you learnt today? What was positive? What could be better?)

33 ACTION PLANNING & FEEDBACK

5 mins Slide 33-34

Hand out skills booklet

Action planning

Action planning

Skills booklet

33-34

Handout 3e Skills booklet

3 hrs End.

TEMPO  

Session  3  Empowering  the  pa6ent  

Individualised  feedback  

 Review  and  reflect  on  your  communica6on  

Session  4:  Shared  Decision  Making  

Involving  pa6ents  in  decisions   Nego6a6on  skills  

Session  3:  Empowering  the  pa6ent  

Agenda  SeMng   Explaining  Psychosis  

Session  2:  Techniques  for  working  with  symptoms  

Responding  to  posi6ve  symptoms   Reframing  nega6ve  symptoms  

Session  1:  Understanding  the  pa6ent  with  psychosis  

Experiencing  Psychosis   EAR:  Explore  Listen  Ac6vely  Respond    

Ac6on  planning  -­‐  recap  

• What  2  skills  did  you  try?  • What  success  did  you  enjoy?  

• What  challenges  arose?  

Pa6ent  &  psychiatrist  priori6es:  Shortlist  Pa#ents Psychiatrists

Community  Mental  Health  Services Management  plan

Treatment/Medica6on/Psychological  interven6ons

Mental  state  examina6on

Personal  /  rela6onship  issues Risk  assessment

Autonomy  &  self-­‐determina6on  

Two  way  communica6on

Social  support

Therapeu6c  interven6ons

To  address  what  the  pa6ent  wants

Slide 1

Slide 3

Slide 2

Slide 4

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 73

Page 210: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

External  context  

• What  are  the  external  pressures?  •  Your  own  agenda?  

Elici6ng  pa6ent’s  priori6es  

•  Early  in  the  mee6ng,  not  when  geMng  ready  to  wrap  up  

When  you  were  on  your  way  here  today,  what  were  you  thinking  that  you’d  like  to  happen  in  our  mee6ng  today?  

Elicit  pa6ent’s  priori6es  

Step  2  –  Explain  your  own  priori6es  

– I  also  have  some  things  that  I  would  like  for  us  to  discuss  including…  

– We  have  the  6me  to  discuss  our  highest  priori6es,  let’s  focus  on  these  and  try  to  answer  some  of  your  ques6ons.    

Agenda  SeMng  -­‐  Steps  

1.  Pa6ent’s  priori6es.  

2.  Own  priori6es.  

3.  Nego6ate.  

4.  Signpost  &  Recap.  

Elicit  pa6ent’s  priori6es  

Step  1  –  Elicit  the  pa6ent’s  priori6es  

– ANY  vs  SOME  – Recap  on  the  concern  raised,  and  then  ask  “is  there  something  else  you  would  like  us  to  address  today?  

– New  vs.  follow-­‐up  pa6ents  – With  new:  “What  is  your  understanding  of  seeing  me  today?”  “Before  you    came,  what  were  your  expecta6ons?”  

When  you  were  on  your  way  here  today  did  you  have  some  things  in  mind  that  you  wanted  to  talk  about?  

Step  3  -­‐  Nego6ate  

• Make  shared  and  explicit  decisions  about  6me.  

• Where  priori6es  differ:  – Ar6culate  pa6ent  &  own  agenda  items    – If  too  many  items,  agree  on  most  important  for  today  

We  have  the  6me  to  discuss  our  highest  priori6es,  let’s  focus  on  these  and  try  to  answer  some  of  your  ques6ons.    

Slide 5

Slide 7

Slide 9

Slide 11

Slide 6

Slide 8

Slide 10

Slide 12

PAGE 74 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 211: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step  4  -­‐  Recap  Recap  and  summarise  the  plan  

•  Your  pa6ent  will  remember  this  beaer  than  early  parts  of  session    

•  Empathy  •  Genuinely  trying  to  move  things  forward  •  End  on  a  posi6ve  note  (Things  might  seem  

difficult  at  the  moment  but  they  will  get  beaer)    

Today  we  have  discussed…  and  agreed…  (In  our  next  consulta6on  we  will  come  back  to  some  of  these  issues).  

Agenda  seMng  Role-­‐play  

•  STEP  1:  Elici6ng  pa6ent’s  priori6es  

Explaining  psychosis  

•  How  to  explain  psychosis  to  pa6ents?  •  Ques6ons  pa6ents  ask  about  their  experiences/  illness  

How  do  you  respond…  

• Why  am  I  paranoid?  • Why  now?  

Agenda  seMng:  EAR  skills  Agenda  se1ng  

Explore   •   Explore  pa6ent’s  priori6es  for  the    session  •   Check  you  have  understood  their  priori6es    

Listen  Ac6vely  

•   Reflect  pa6ent’s  language  •   Summarize  periodically    •   So  what’s  concerning  you  at  the  moment  is..  

Respond   • Acknowledge  effect  of  pa6ent’s  concerns    • Explain  your  own  priori6es  •   Recap  

Break!  

Ques6ons  about  psychosis  

Other  egs  of  pa6ent  ques6ons    

•  ‘Do  you  think  my  mind  is  unbalanced?’  •  ‘Is  my  schizophrenia  learnt  from  my  family  or  is  it  gene6c?’  

•  ‘What  is  it,  an  illness?  I  just  don’t  know?  Is  it  my  personality?’  

•  ‘Do  they  exist  -­‐  people  who  are  causing  this  sickness?’  

Slide 13

Slide 15

Slide 17

Slide 19

Slide 14

Slide 16

Slide 18

Slide 20

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 75

Page 212: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

Explaining  psychosis  • What  does  the  pa6ent  ask?    •  Listen  for  pa6ents’  prompts    – signals  from  pa6ents  that  their  concerns  have  not    been  explored,  e.g.  ‘my  girlfriend  has  been  very  worried  about  me’,  ‘I  just  don’t  understand’    

–   resta6ng  a  problem  • What  is  the  subtext  -­‐  what  are  they  really  worried  about?  

•  If  relevant,  ask  pa6ents  if  they  want  to  know  more  about….  

Psychosis  •  ‘Psychosis’  relates  to  experiences,  such  as  hearing  or  seeing  things  or  holding  unusual  beliefs,  which  other  people  don’t  experience  or  share.    

•  Psycho6c  experiences  can  be  just  like  ‘waking  dreams’,  where  strange  things  happen  and  our  percep6ons  are  altered.  Like  dreams,  they  feel  real  and  intense.  

•  Schizophrenia  used  to  mean  XXX.  We  know  now  that…prognosis      

•       

You  have  an  illness    (select  depending  on  what  the  pa7ent  is  asking).  It  is  not  uncommon  for  people  to  have  experiences  like  the  ones  you’ve  described.  Our  brains  can  easily  become  paranoid  (or  depressed  or  …).  

Voices  

•  Hearing  voices  when  nobody  is  around  or  at  least  when  nobody  seems  to  be  saying  the  words  you  hear  is  part  of  your  illness.  

•  Causes:  Very  stressful  circumstances  (  bereavement,  hostage),  sleep  depriva6on,  drugs,  mental  illness  

• 1  in  20  people  hear  voices  at  some  point  in  their  lives.    • Many  famous,  very  successful  people  hear  voices  –  the  actor  Anthony  Hopkins,  the  musician  Brian  Wilson  from  the  Beach  Boys.    

Thought  disorder  

•  Happens  when  your  thoughts  get  muddled  and  jumbled  up.  

Useful  6ps  

•  Be  aware  of  tendency  to  avoid  these  ques6ons  •  Don’t  overload  on  informa6on  –  get  a  balance  between  ‘informing’  and  aaending  to  the  pa6ent’s  concern  

•  Have  a  model  to  work  with  for  explaining  psychosis  –  don’t  pass  it  on.  i.e.  ‘The  psychologist  or  your  nurse  will  talk  about  that’.    

•  Clarify  what  the  pa6ent  means  (e.g.  Why  am  I  paranoid?).  What  does  the  pa6ent  mean  by  paranoid?  

Causes  

•   While  we  don’t  know  exactly  what  causes  schizophrenia,  it  seems  to  be  a  combina6on  of  the  genes  we  inherit,  how  our  brain  works  and  stress.  

Feeling  suspicious  

•  Suspicious  thoughts  about  others  are  described  as  paranoid  when  they  are  exaggerated  and  interfere  with  your  day  to  day  life  –  A  central  part  is  a  sense  of  threat    

•  Jumping  to  conclusions  •  Self-­‐reference  •  People  in  a  vulnerable  state  of  mind:  Major  life  events,  

feeling  isolated,  anxiety  and  depression,  poor  sleep,  drugs,  physical  causes  (e.g.  demen6a)  

   Many  people  have  suspicious  thoughts  or  worries  about  others  from  6me  to  6me.  

Prognosis  

•  Many  people  with  schizophrenia  never  have  to  go  into  hospital  and  are  able  to  seale  down,  work  and  have  las6ng  rela6onships.  If  we  consider  5  people  with  schizophrenia,  1  will  get  beaer  within  five  years  of  their  first  obvious  symptoms  and  don’t  experience  any  further  psycho6c  symptoms;  3  will  get  beaer,  but  will  have  6mes  when  they  get  worse  again;  and  1  will  have  troublesome  symptoms  for  longer  periods  of  6me.  

•  Most  people  (with  schizophrenia)  have  a  good  outcome  over  6me/  lead  good  lives  with  the  effec6ve  treatments  that  are  available    

Slide 21

Slide 23

Slide 25

Slide 27

Slide 22

Slide 24

Slide 26

Slide 28

PAGE 76 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 213: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Explaining  psychosis:  EAR-­‐skills  Explaining  Psychosis  

Explore   •   Explore  pa6ent’s  understanding  of  illness/psychosis  •   Explore  pa6ent’s  need  for  informa6on      

Listen  Ac6vely  

•   Listen  for  pa6ent’s  prompts    •   Nonverbal  feedback  •   Echo  –  reflect  back  what  pa6ent  has  said    

Respond   •   Acknowledge  pa6ent’s  concerns  about  psychosis    •   Normalise  experiences  

Informa6on  &  Peer  Support  

•  Pa6ent  informa6on  materials:  – Royal  College  for  psychiatrists  – Mind  – Rethink  – ScoMsh  recovery  net  – My  name  is  Pete  comic  

•  Florid    -­‐  service  user  organiza6on  in  ELFT  •  Hearing  Voices  Groups    

Skills  booklet  

• Content:  – Learning  points,  helpful  phrases,  ac6on  plan,  EAR-­‐table  

Explaining  Psychosis  Role-­‐play  

•  Explain  psychosis  to  pa6ent  and  normalise!  

Pa6ent  material  online  

•  hap://www.scoMshrecovery.net/  •  hap://www.rcpsych.ac.uk/mentalhealthinfoforall/problems/schizophrenia/schizophrenia.aspx  

•  hap://www.rethink.org/about_mental_illness/peoples_experiences/your_experiences/index.html  

•  hap://www.mind.org.uk/help  

Ac6on  planning  

•  Choose  two  of  the  agenda-­‐se1ng  and  explaining  skills  you  think  would  benefit  your  prac6ce  this  week.  

1.  2.  How  important  is  it  to  you  to  use  this  in  your  prac6ce  in  the  next  week?  

                               

How  confident  are  you  that  you  will  use  it  in  your  prac6ce  in  the  next  week?  

Not  important  at  all   Extremely  important  

0   5   10  

Not  confident  at  all   Extremely  confident  

0   5   10  

Slide 29

Slide 31

Slide 33

Slide 30

Slide 32

Slide 34

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 77

Page 214: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID I: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 3 – AGENDA SETTING ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

This role-play will take place in groups of 2-3 psychiatrists with one

actor, one facilitator and one trainer. Each psychiatrist should have

a turn at doing the role-play. If there are 2 psychiatrists, allow 20

minutes per psychiatrist. If there are 3 psychiatrists, allow 15 minutes

per psychiatrist.

Give each psychiatrist the background information on the patient in

the scenario (see handout 3a).

PROCEDURE

1. See guidance for facilitators – role-play with simulated patient and

video-feedback

2. Ask observing psychiatrists to get pen and paper to take notes

during role-play.

3. Allow approx. 5 minutes for the first round of role-play.

4. Following this, ask for the participants’ self-reflection, i.e. ask

participants what went well, where they feel they had difficulty or

got stuck.

5. Ask the actor to provide in-role feedback.

6. Ask the other participants who were observing the role-play how

they perceived the role-play/the communication.

7. Offer your feedback, offer suggestions for alternative ways of

conducting the interview; provide suggestions on request from

the person conducting the interview; or supply a replacement

interviewer who can attempt to put any suggestions into effect.

AIM

Psychiatrists to

practise agenda

setting step 1, i.e.,

eliciting the patient’s

priorities

PAGE 78 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 215: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

Name: Karen/John

SETTING

This is a 35 year-old, unemployed man/woman who lives with his/her spouse. S/he has

come to the appointment with the psychiatrist alone. This is the second time s/he is

seeing this psychiatrist.

THE PATIENT’S GOALS FOR THIS CONSULTATION

The presenting agenda: S/he wants to talk about weight gain, a side effect of

his/her medication, Olanzapine. In the back of his/her mind, s/he wants to reduce

his/her medication.

Also relevant: S/he is currently hearing very distressing voices telling him/her to pour

hot water over his/her wife/husband. S/he is worried that s/he will lose control and

subsequently harm his/her husband/wife. S/he doesn’t know how to handle this situation

and how to prevent him/herself from acting on the voices.

PATIENT’S BEHAVIOUR IN THE CONSULTATION

S/he is quite a passive patient, i.e. doesn’t ask too many questions, doesn’t do more

talking than the psychiatrist and is not too open about feelings/concerns. She/he seems

flat/low/a bit anxious and avoids direct eye contact most of the time. S/he is somewhat

guarded. S/he doesn’t feel comfortable disclosing his/her concerns about the distressing

voices straight away in the consultation.

Being asked what s/he wants to talk about today/in the consultation he/she mentions

concern about weight gain and the long term effects of medication – not the voices.

The psychiatrist should feel that there is something that the patient is not telling him/

that he/she is holding back. The psychiatrist should work hard (using exploring & active

listening skills) to elicit patient’s concerns about voices. Patient is dropping hints rather

than explicitly raising his/her concern (e.g. the patient is not sleeping well, listens to music

a lot, doesn’t see wife/husband as frequently as they used to all related to hearing

voices).

Patient drops some hints by saying ‘the voices keep bugging me a bit sometimes’. ‘The voices are sometimes bad’.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 79

Page 216: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

MENTAL HEALTH HISTORY

The patient has been diagnosed with schizophrenia in her/his twenties following a

psychotic episode, (when they locked her/his husband/wife out of the house and s/he

had to call the police). Patient was hospitalized for 2 weeks following this episode. S/he

gave up work then. Ever since, patient has been on antipsychotic medication (Olanzapine).

CURRENT SITUATION

The patient is currently hearing voices (although not every day) telling him to pour hot

water over his/her wife/husband. They are particularly present in the evenings when he/

she is with wife/husband. To date, he/she has managed to resist following the voices’

orders by leaving the house or listening to music. But as they are getting more frequent

and louder, he/she is growing more and more worried that he/she will lose control and

subsequently harm his/her husband/wife.

The patient has been married to his/her wife/husband for 6 years and s/he has been very

supportive – especially during the time when patient was hospitalized five years ago. S/he

is aware of patient’s illness and constantly worries about him/her. Although patient has

locked her/him out of the house in the past, he/she has never harmed spouse physically

and patient has not told him/her about the current violent voices.

Patient is worried not just about whether they might do something to ‘wife/husband -

but also that spouse has to put up with all of this ‘nonsense’ all the time. They don’t have

a sexual relationship now. Patient feels like a burden to her/him. Today the patient has

come on his/her own.

The patient is unemployed, doesn’t have any children and his/her only hobby is gardening.

Note: Real consultation examples (see Role-play instructions for actors) should give the actor an idea of how psychiatrists and patients communicate in a similar situation.

1st example: Patient is worried about weight gain (see Instructions for Actors)

2nd example: Patient hears voices telling him to pour water over his carer (see Instructions for Actors)

PAGE 80 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 217: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID II: INSTRUCTIONS FOR ACTORS

SESSION 3 – AGENDA SETTING ROLE-PLAY

PROCEDURE

This role-play takes place in front of the whole group. One psychiatrist

and patient will role-play at one time. Please take playing the patient

in turns (if more than one actor involved).

1. Role-play

2. Verbal feedback from you (in-role) and psychiatrist

3. Verbal feedback from group

4. Based on feedback, the facilitator highlights a particular point in

the role- play to focus on

5. Psychiatrist should have another go at this particular part of the

role-play

AIM

Participants to practise

agenda setting step

1, i.e., eliciting the

patient’s priorities for

the consultation

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 81

Page 218: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

Name: Karen/John

SETTING

You are a 35 year-old, unemployed man/woman who lives with your spouse. You have

come to the appointment with the psychiatrist alone. This is the second time you are

seeing this psychiatrist.

YOUR GOALS FOR THIS CONSULTATION

Your presenting agenda: You want to talk about weight gain, a side effect of your

medication, Olanzapine. In the back of your mind is the possibility of reducing your

medication.

Also relevant: You are currently hearing very distressing voices telling you to pour

hot water over your wife/husband. You are worried that you will lose control and

subsequently harm your husband/wife. You don’t know how to handle this situation and

how to prevent yourself from acting on the voices.

YOUR BEHAVIOR IN THE CONSULTATION

You are quite a passive patient, i.e. don’t ask too many questions, don’t do more talking

than the psychiatrist and don’t be too open about your feelings/concerns. You seem flat/

low/bit anxious and you avoid direct eye contact most of the time. You are are somewhat

guarded. You don’t feel comfortable disclosing your concern about the distressing voices

straight away in the consultation.

Being asked what you would like to talk about today/in the consultation you mention

your concern about weight gain and the long term effects of medication – don’t mention

the voices.

The psychiatrist should feel that there is something that you are not telling him/that you

are holding back. Make him/her work hard (using exploring & active listening skills) to

elicit your concerns about voices). You are dropping hints rather than explicitly raising

your concern (e.g. your sleeping is bad, you listen to music a lot, you don’t see your wife/

husband as frequently as you used to, i.e. avoid her all related to hearing voices).

You can also drop some hints by saying ‘the voices keeping bugging me a bit sometimes’. ‘The voices are sometimes bad’.

PAGE 82 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 219: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

MENTAL HEALTH HISTORY

You have been diagnosed with schizophrenia in your twenties following a psychotic

episode, (where you locked your partner out of the house and he/she had to call the

police). You were hospitalized for 2 weeks following this episode. You gave up work then.

Ever since, you have been taking antipsychotic medication (Olanzapine).

CURRENT SITUATION

You are currently hearing voices (although not every day) telling you to pour hot water

over your wife/husband. They are particularly present in the evenings when you are with

your wife/husband. To date, you have managed to resist following the voices’ orders by

leaving the house or listening to music. But as they are getting more frequent and louder,

you are growing more and more worried that you will lose control and subsequently

harm your husband/wife.

You have been married to your wife/husband for 6 years and s/he has been very

supportive – especially during the time when you were hospitalized five years ago. S/he

is aware of your illness and constantly worries about you. Although you have locked her/

him out of the house in the past, you have never harmed her/him physically and you have

not told him/her about your current violent voices.

You are worried not just about whether you might do something to your ‘wife/husband

- but also that s/he has to put up with all of this ‘nonsense’ all the time. You don’t have

a sexual relationship now. You feel a burden to her/him. Today you have come on your

own.

You are unemployed, don’t have any children and your only hobby is gardening.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 83

Page 220: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

REAL CONSULTATION EXAMPLE

See transcripts of real consultations for ways of broaching topics – patients may be more reticent – slow in coming forth than role-play so we would like you to play it ‘for real’.

1ST EXAMPLE: PATIENT IS WORRIED ABOUT WEIGHT GAIN

P = PatientC = PsychiatristA = Carer

C: Great so yeah just (.) essentially wondering how (.) you’re getting on at the

moment?

P: Yes I I’m doing quite well really um

C: Ok (1.8) I know there was a big problem with you (.) putting on weight [wasn’t

there] you were worrying about that

P: [Yeah yeah]

P: Yeah I’ve still got problems (.) um .hhh

C: Ok

P: My weight gain is a sort of a worry

A: It’s the food it’s it’s

C: Yeah

P: Mmm

A: The (.) putting on weight it’s wh- it’s your biggest

C: Yeah

A: Concern at the moment isn’t it?

P: Yeah

PAGE 84 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 221: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

2ND EXAMPLE: PATIENT HEARS VOICES TELLING HIM TO POUR WATER OVER HIS CARER

Note: While in this example it is the carer who brings up the voices telling the patient to pour hot water, in the role-play it will be the patient who eventually discloses these concerns.

While there is a carer present at this consultation, this is irrelevant for the scenario of the role-play.

C = Clinician ( = Psychiatrist )P = PatientA = Carer, patient’s partner

C: How are you?

P: Alright alright

C: Yeah

P: Fairly alright (2) I’m fine

C: Any issues you want to raise at all?

A: [Mm]

P: [Yeah um]

P: (3) Th:e (2) sleeping has been (1) a little bit of a problem

C: Mm

P: It’s not the only problem but um (1) at about an hour or so after you take the

medication you get a wave of tiredness

C: Right

P: I think I’m starting to get used to it (.) the whole thing you know as time goes on

C: Right

P: I get used to the feeling and used to more used to deal with dealing with the

feeling (.) and that

C: Okay

P: And umm (1) there’s paranoia

C: Yes

P: I think there’s something else that I wanted to talk about (3.2)

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 85

Page 222: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

A: You’ve had the [voices] back again haven’t you

P: [Say]

P: Yeah I mean

C: Mmm mmm

P: I’ve had had a (.8) spell of paranoia

C: Right and there is something else as well I can’t quite remember at the moment (.)

um (4) can’t [(think at the [moment)]]

A: [(You had uh]

[Didn’t] you this Thursday um (.) night have a bad voice

One told you in the kitchen to pour boiling water

C: Pardon

A: You had the voice in the kitchen that told you to pour boiling water over me

P: Yeah [yeah] (.6) yeah

A: [Um]

C: Ok

P: That was another thing (.) that was bad

C: Mm (1) alright but that

A: You’ve been [quite troubled over the last ten days haven’t you] [mm]

P: [Um (.) oh that w- that was (.) me telling you] about it [it’d] been going on for

some time

C: Mmm mmm

P: I wasn’t s- (.) I wasn’t quite sure whether to tell you about it or not

A: But you did (.) and that was a good thing

P: But um (1.4) I (.) there was definitely something else and I can’t quite (1.4) think

of it but that is (.4) causing a problem

PAGE 86 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 223: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 3A: INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICIPANTS

SESSION 3 – AGENDA SETTING ROLE-PLAY

This is Karen*. She is 35 years old. This is the second time you are seeing her at your outpatient clinic.

Karen has been diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia in her twenties. She has a history of hearing voices and has been hospitalised once before for acting on voices.

She is unemployed and is living with her husband.

Task: Practise agenda setting step 1 (eliciting the patient’s priorities).

*or John

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 87

Page 224: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 3B: HOW TO EXPLAIN PSYCHOSIS TO YOUR PATIENT?

1. Have a model to work with for explaining patient’s problems – don’t say “The

psychologist or your nurse will talk about that”. You might say what they’ve raised is

important and you’ll share this conversation with other members of the team.

2. Clarify what the patient means (e.g. “Why am I paranoid?”). What does the patient

mean by paranoid?

3. Acknowledge distress and anxiety.

4. Communicate risk clearly. For example:

5. “Many people with schizophrenia never have to go into hospital and are able to settle down, work and have lasting relationships. If we consider five people with schizophrenia, one will get better within five years of their first obvious symptoms and won’t experience any further psychotic symptoms; three will get better, but will have times when they get worse again; and one will have troublesome symptoms for longer periods of time”.

6. Replace jargon (e.g. ‘prognosis’, ‘multifactorial’) with lay phrases.

7. When explaining psychosis, don’t overload on information – get a balance between

‘informing’ and attending to the patient’s concern.

8. If you don’t know the precise information the patient is looking for, say you will find

out about it and talk about it next time you meet.

9. If you know there is no definitive answer to the question the patient asks, then

be honest – explain that “many things remain unknown, but the things that are known are .....”.

GREAT PHRASES USED IN ROLE-PLAYS:

“I’m glad you trust me to tell me this.”

“It is good that you are asking these questions and trying to understand this.”

“Can I check that I am understanding you? What you have told me is…..”

PAGE 88 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 225: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

“I’m wondering about what you have just told me.”

“What stopped you? [from obeying orders to harm others]?”

“People live good lives, are in relationships and have jobs.”

“We are here to help you with this.”

USEFUL PHRASES:

“You don’t have to worry about it” → Reframe with specific relevant information e.g.

“The risk is a little bit higher than the general population”

“Are you taking your medication?” This is difficult to say ‘no’ to. Give permission to people

to tell you they may not be → “I know some of my patients sometimes decide to cut

down on their medication. What’s happening with you at the moment?”

“You have an illness” ➞ Select depending on what the patient is asking “It is not

uncommon for people to have experiences like the ones you’ve described. Our brains can

easily become paranoid (or depressed or …). While we don’t know exactly what causes

schizophrenia, it seems to be a combination of the genes we inherit, how our brain works

and stress. Most people (with schizophrenia) have a good outcome over time/ lead good

lives with the effective treatments that are available ”…….”When we are under stress,

these experiences can become worse. It’s okay to take medication to help get them under

control”

“Lots of people hear voices at some point in their lives. About 1 in 50 people hear voices.

Some famous, very successful people hear voices – the actor Anthony Hopkins, the

musician Brian Wilson from the Beach Boys.”

Normalising alternatives: Anybody could hear voices if certain conditions are given: Sleep

deprivation and other stressful circumstances: e.g. bereavement, hostages, dreaming,

PTSD. Like dreaming when you’re awake.

Understand hallucinations – mind hears things, not coming through the ears, but coming

from your mind, voice area in brain active (broca’s area).

UNDERSTANDING PSYCHOTIC EXPERIENCES

Psychotic experiences, such as hearing voices or experiencing delusions, are surprisingly

common, but can also lead to diagnoses such as schizophrenia or bipolar disorder.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 89

Page 226: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

WHAT DOES ‘PSYCHOTIC’ MEAN?

The word ‘psychotic’ relates to ‘psychosis’, which is a psychiatric term, and describes

experiences, such as hearing or seeing things or holding unusual beliefs, which other

people don’t experience or share. For many people, these experiences can be highly

distressing and disruptive, interfering with everyday life, conversations, relationships,

and finding or keeping a job.

One theory is that when you experience psychosis, your brain is in the same state as

when you are dreaming. When we are dreaming, all sorts of strange and sometimes

frightening things can happen to us, and while we are asleep we believe that they are

really happening. Psychotic experiences can be just like ‘waking dreams’, feeling as real

and intense.

WHAT CAUSES PSYCHOTIC EXPERIENCES?

Almost anyone can have a brief psychotic episode. There are different ideas about why

psychotic experiences develop. But it’s generally thought that some people are more

vulnerable to them than others, that stressful or traumatic events make them more

likely to occur and that one’s attitude to the experience, as well as the attitudes of others,

also play a part. Psychotic experiences may be caused by a variety of factors including

drug use, changes in brain chemistry, inherited vulnerability, and traumatic events such

as abuse.

PAGE 90 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 227: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID III: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 3 – EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

The second role-play will take place in front of the whole group. Each

psychiatrist should have a turn at doing the role-play. The three actors

should take playing the patient in turns. If there are six psychiatrists,

allow 5 minutes role-playing plus 5 minutes feedback per psychiatrist.

Give each psychiatrist the background information (see handout 3d).

The patient is the same patient as in the previous role-play.

PROCEDURE

See guidance for facilitators – role-play with simulated patient and

video-feedback

1. Ask observing psychiatrists to get pen and paper to take notes

during role-play.

2. Allow approx. 5 minutes for the first round of role-play.

3. Following this, ask for the participants’ self-reflection, i.e. ask

participants what went well, where they feel they had difficulty or

got stuck.

4. Ask the actor to provide in-role feedback.

5. Ask the other participants who were observing the role-play how

they perceived the role-play/the communication.

6. Offer your feedback, offer suggestions for alternative ways of

conducting the interview; provide suggestions on request from

the person conducting the interview; or supply a replacement

interviewer who can attempt to put any suggestions into effect.

AIM

Psychiatrists to

practise responding

to patient prompts

and specific questions

(e.g. regarding cause

and prognosis,)

providing information

and explaining

schizophrenia to

patient – in a simple

jargon-free way

and normalise the

psychotic experience.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 91

Page 228: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

The same patient and background etc. are the same as in the first role-play (teaching aid I).

The role-play starts some time in to the consultation and focuses on patient asking/

prompting questions about her/his illness. He/she doesn’t really understand what the

diagnosis implies, why she/he is schizophrenic and what it really means, what is going on

in his/her head and is looking for some explanation and reassurance from the psychiatrist.

Patient starts the role-play by saying:

1. I think that umm (.) sometimes I think that I’m different from other people (.)

[because] of my illness

Further follow-on questions the actor may ask the psychiatrist:

2. What is it, an illness? I just don’t know? Is it my personality?

3. Why am I hearing voices?

4. Why am I paranoid?

5. Is my schizophrenia learnt from my family dynamics or is it genetic?

6. What’s going to happen in the future?

Note: Real consultation examples (see Instructions for actors) should give the actor an idea of how psychiatrists and patients communicate in a similar situation.

PAGE 92 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 229: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID IV: INSTRUCTIONS FOR ACTORS

SESSION 3 – EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS ROLE-PLAY

PROCEDURE

This role-play takes place in front of the whole group. One psychiatrist

and patient will role-play at one time. Please take playing the patient

in turns (if more than one actor involved).

1. Role-play

2. Verbal feedback from you (in-role) and psychiatrist

3. Verbal feedback from group

4. Based on feedback, the facilitator highlights a particular point in

the role- play to focus on

5. Psychiatrist should have another go at this particular part of the

role-play

AIM

Psychiatrists to

practise responding

to patient prompts

and specific questions

(e.g. regarding cause

and prognosis,) and

explaining illness – in

a simple jargon-free

way and normalise the

psychotic experience

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 93

Page 230: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

You are still the same patient, same background etc. as in the first role-play (see

Teaching aid II).

The role-play starts some time in to the consultation and focuses on you asking/

prompting questions about your illness. You don’t really understand what your diagnosis

implies, why you are schizophrenic and what it really means, what is going on in your

head, worried that you are crazy. Hence you are looking for some information and

reassurance from the psychiatrist.

So you can start the role-play by prompting your worries and need for information

by saying:

1. I think that umm (.) sometimes I think that I’m different from other people (.)

[because] of my illness

Further follow-on questions you can ask the psychiatrist:

2. What is it, an illness? I just don’t know? Is it my personality?

3. Why am I hearing voices?

4. Why am I paranoid?

5. Is my schizophrenia learnt from my family dynamics or is it genetic?

6. What’s going to happen in the future?

REAL CONSULTATION EXAMPLE

Real consultation example for need for explaining psychosis (shows patient prompting and displaying need for information and reassurance):

C When I when I met you last time you said you weren’t suffering from any para

paranoia?

P No well -

C So things got worse?

P No not got worse I don’t know it’s just that my kids they did tell me every little

thing I just (.) you know don’t know why

C So what have are your children saying that’s bothering you?

PAGE 94 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 231: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

P No no erm just like I wasn’t like that before so really it’s just every little thing now

(.) I just get paranoid for it and (.) I think that’s not right and this thing has been

going on for a long time now sometimes you are ok::ay and sometimes you are

j::ust (.2)

C Okay

P Can’t hide things you know?

C What are you most paranoid about though?

P It’s everything (.) sometimes erm its just (sucks on teeth), I just believe my kids

I tell them they just get on my nerves everything sometimes they ask me for

him and I just shout at them or something and if I go to the kitchen and they’re

talking I tell them that what are they talking about me or something like that =

C Umm

P You know it’s just like that

C Do you feel that there’s anybody trying to harm you in the community or anything

like that?

P N::o no it’s just -

C The community your neighbours the police anybody [else?]

P [N::o n::o] it’s just paranoid enough sometimes my world is blue you know =

C Umm

P Umm that’s it

C What about erm you mention people from your own country, is there anybody

from your own country who is, who you think is out to harm you?

P Er::rr not really, sometimes I think like that, like when I see some people from my

place, buts it’s just that my kids would say to me that mummy don’t worry it’s

nothing to worry about like I think (.) if someone looking at me I just think why is

she looking at me like that for =

C Okay

P In terms of that you know and she always tells me I know my big girl says to me

mummy don’t worry you get paranoid for every little thing you know

C When I what I’d like to do is erm (.4) I think yo e::rr just over the next couple of

weeks I think you need a medication to relax you it’s not a long term medication

(.) but I think your DRUG needs -

P Why am I getting paranoid now, why now?

C I think it’s part of your illness

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 95

Page 232: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

P Is it?

C Yeh, I erm so what I’m going to do is I’m going to arrange an appointment to see

you again= (ignored request)

P Is it, is it normal sometimes I feel something moving in my head, is that normal like something moving on my head like?

C Inside your head [or?]

P [Yeh] inside my skull, is that normal? Or is it part of, part of the illness?

C Do you, do you really feel it or is it a sensation?

P Is it like what I’m thinking, is that what you mean?

C No, is it just err the mind playing tricks on you, or is it something-

P No no it’s not my mind, it’s nothing, it’s something, sometimes I feel like

something’s in my head

C Okay I thinks it’s err, I think it’s part of the illness =

P Is it

C I’m I [believe]

P [Why] does it for instance keep coming out and why is it like that why why?

C It’s very hard to explain but the the condition the condition you have (.2) this type

of feeling that part of your body is being controlled =

P Okay

C Is a feature, which is why I asked the question to begin [with]

P [ohh] okay

C I’m I’m confident that in a couple of weeks time you will feel better, like must take

the medicine, like what I’m going to do is today (.2) er::m I’m going to post a

prescription to you=

P Okay

PAGE 96 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 233: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 1C: INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICIPANTS

SESSION 3 – EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS ROLE-PLAY

This is the same patient (Karen/John) – This role-play starts some time in to the consultation.

John/Karen is clearly distressed by her/his experience of psychosis and wants to understand more about what is happening to her/him and about the illness in general.

Task: Practise responding to patient prompts and specific questions (e.g. regarding cause and prognosis,) providing information and explaining about the psychotic experience to patient – in a simple jargon-free way and normalise the psychotic experience. Listen for relevant prompts!

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 97

Page 234: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 3E: BOOKLET SESSION 3

COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN PSYCHOSIS TRAINING

SESSION THREE: EMPOWERING THE PATIENT

AGENDA SETTING STEPS

1. Patient’s priorities: “When you were on your way here today did you have a

particular thing in mind that you wanted to talk about with

me?”

“What are the key things you would like us to focus on today?”

“What do you want to make sure happens before you leave

here today?”

“Recap on the concern raised, and then ask “is there something

else?”

“Are there other things that you would like us to address

today?”

2. Own priorities. I also have some things that I would like for us to discuss

including…

Before the end of our consultation I would like to discuss

…… with you.

We have the time to discuss our highest priorities, let’s focus on

these and try to answer some of your questions.

3. Negotiate. (session 4)

4. Signpost & Recap. ‘Signpost’: show you are still planning to cover all agreed

priorities

We have discussed your housing situation, and we are going to

discuss your medication in a little while. Before we do

that, can you tell me a bit more about your side effects?

Refer back to explicit agenda at the end of consultation and

recap on the issues covered

Today we have discussed… and agreed… In our next

consultation we could come back to some of these issues,

and others we have mentioned

PAGE 98 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

AGEN

DA

SETT

ING

STE

PS

1. P

atie

nt’

s p

rio

riti

es:

“Whe

n yo

u w

ere

on y

our

way

her

e to

day

did

you

have

a p

artic

ular

thi

ng in

min

d th

at y

ou

wan

ted

to t

alk

abou

t w

ith m

e?”

“W

hat

are

the

key

thin

gs y

ou w

ould

like

us

to

focu

s on

tod

ay?”

“W

hat

do y

ou w

ant

to m

ake

sure

hap

pens

befo

re y

ou le

ave

here

tod

ay?”

“R

ecap

on

the

conc

ern

rais

ed, a

nd t

hen

ask

“is

ther

e so

met

hing

els

e?”

“A

re t

here

oth

er t

hing

s th

at y

ou w

ould

like

us

to

addr

ess

toda

y?”

2. O

wn

pri

ori

ties

. I a

lso

have

som

e th

ings

tha

t I w

ould

like

for

us

to

disc

uss

incl

udin

g…

Be

fore

the

end

of

our

cons

ulta

tion

I wou

ld li

ke t

o

disc

uss

……

with

you

.

W

e ha

ve t

he t

ime

to d

iscu

ss o

ur h

ighe

st p

riorit

ies,

let’

s fo

cus

on t

hese

and

try

to

answ

er s

ome

of

your

que

stio

ns.

3. N

ego

tiat

e.

(ses

sion

4)

4. S

ign

po

st &

Rec

ap.

‘Sig

npos

t’: s

how

you

are

stil

l pla

nnin

g to

cov

er a

ll

agre

ed p

riorit

ies

W

e ha

ve d

iscu

ssed

you

r ho

usin

g si

tuat

ion,

and

we

are

goin

g to

dis

cuss

you

r m

edic

atio

n in

a

little

whi

le. B

efor

e w

e do

tha

t, c

an y

ou t

ell m

e a

bit

mor

e ab

out

your

sid

e ef

fect

s?

Re

fer

back

to

expl

icit

agen

da a

t th

e en

d of

cons

ulta

tion

and

reca

p on

the

issu

es c

over

ed

To

day

we

have

dis

cuss

ed…

and

agr

eed…

In o

ur

next

con

sulta

tion

we

coul

d co

me

back

to

som

e

of t

hese

issu

es, a

nd o

ther

s w

e ha

ve m

entio

ned

HAN

DO

UT

3E: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

3

PAG

E 01

COM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N S

KILL

S IN

PSY

CHO

SIS

TRAI

NIN

G –

SES

SIO

N 3

: EM

POW

ERIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

Page 235: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS

ACKNOWLEDGING AND UNDERSTANDING:

Important to acknowledge that it might be difficult for someone to talk/concentrate if

they are distracted by e.g. voices.

Acknowledge any distress and anxiety.

Helpful phrases used in roleplays:

“I’m glad you trust me to tell me this”.

“Can I check that I am understanding you? What you have told me is..”

“I’m wondering about what you have just told me.. Can you tell me a bit more?”

LEARNING POINTS:

EXPLAINING:

Ask the patient if they want to know about anything – be aware of the tendency to avoid

difficult questions.

Clarify what the patient means: e.g. “Why am I paranoid?” what does the patient mean

by paranoid?

What might be the subtext to the patient’s questions?

When explaining psychosis, don’t overload the patient with information –attend to the

patient’s concerns.

Replace jargon (e.g. prognosis, multifactorial) with lay phrases.

If you don’t know the precise information the patient is looking for, say you will find out

and talk about it the next time you meet.

Have a model to work with for explaining patient’s problems – don’t say “The

psychologist or your nurse will talk about that”. You might say what they’ve raised is

important and you’ll share this conversation with other members of the team.

If you know there is no definitive answer to the question the patient asks, then be honest

- explain that many things remain unknown but what is known is .....”.

Helpful phrases from role-plays:

“It is good that you are asking these questions and trying to understand this”

“What stopped you?” (obeying orders to harm others)

“We are here to help you with this”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 99

AGEN

DA

SETT

ING

STE

PS

1. P

atie

nt’

s p

rio

riti

es:

“Whe

n yo

u w

ere

on y

our

way

her

e to

day

did

you

have

a p

artic

ular

thi

ng in

min

d th

at y

ou

wan

ted

to t

alk

abou

t w

ith m

e?”

“W

hat

are

the

key

thin

gs y

ou w

ould

like

us

to

focu

s on

tod

ay?”

“W

hat

do y

ou w

ant

to m

ake

sure

hap

pens

befo

re y

ou le

ave

here

tod

ay?”

“R

ecap

on

the

conc

ern

rais

ed, a

nd t

hen

ask

“is

ther

e so

met

hing

els

e?”

“A

re t

here

oth

er t

hing

s th

at y

ou w

ould

like

us

to

addr

ess

toda

y?”

2. O

wn

pri

ori

ties

. I a

lso

have

som

e th

ings

tha

t I w

ould

like

for

us

to

disc

uss

incl

udin

g…

Be

fore

the

end

of

our

cons

ulta

tion

I wou

ld li

ke t

o

disc

uss

……

with

you

.

W

e ha

ve t

he t

ime

to d

iscu

ss o

ur h

ighe

st p

riorit

ies,

let’

s fo

cus

on t

hese

and

try

to

answ

er s

ome

of

your

que

stio

ns.

3. N

ego

tiat

e.

(ses

sion

4)

4. S

ign

po

st &

Rec

ap.

‘Sig

npos

t’: s

how

you

are

stil

l pla

nnin

g to

cov

er a

ll

agre

ed p

riorit

ies

W

e ha

ve d

iscu

ssed

you

r ho

usin

g si

tuat

ion,

and

we

are

goin

g to

dis

cuss

you

r m

edic

atio

n in

a

little

whi

le. B

efor

e w

e do

tha

t, c

an y

ou t

ell m

e a

bit

mor

e ab

out

your

sid

e ef

fect

s?

Re

fer

back

to

expl

icit

agen

da a

t th

e en

d of

cons

ulta

tion

and

reca

p on

the

issu

es c

over

ed

To

day

we

have

dis

cuss

ed…

and

agr

eed…

In o

ur

next

con

sulta

tion

we

coul

d co

me

back

to

som

e

of t

hese

issu

es, a

nd o

ther

s w

e ha

ve m

entio

ned

HAN

DO

UT

3E: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

3

PAG

E 01

COM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N S

KILL

S IN

PSY

CHO

SIS

TRAI

NIN

G –

SES

SIO

N 3

: EM

POW

ERIN

G T

HE

PATI

ENT

EXPL

AIN

ING

PSY

CHO

SIS

AC

KNO

WLE

DG

ING

AN

D U

ND

ERST

AN

DIN

G:

Impo

rtan

t to

ack

now

ledg

e th

at it

mig

ht b

e di

fficu

lt fo

r so

meo

ne t

o ta

lk/

conc

entr

ate

if th

ey a

re d

istr

acte

d by

e.g

. voi

ces.

Ack

now

ledg

e an

y di

stre

ss a

nd a

nxie

ty.

Hel

pfu

l ph

rase

s u

sed

in r

ole

pla

ys:

“I’m

gla

d yo

u tr

ust

me

to t

ell m

e th

is”.

“Can

I ch

eck

that

I am

und

erst

andi

ng y

ou?

Wha

t yo

u ha

ve t

old

me

is..”

“I’m

won

derin

g ab

out

wha

t yo

u ha

ve ju

st t

old

me.

. Can

you

tel

l me

a bi

t

mor

e?”

LEAR

NIN

G P

OIN

TS:

EXPL

AIN

ING

:

Ask

the

pat

ient

if t

hey

wan

t to

kno

w a

bout

any

thin

g –

be a

war

e of

the

tend

ency

to

avoi

d di

fficu

lt qu

estio

ns.

Cla

rify

wha

t th

e pa

tient

mea

ns: e

.g. “

Why

am

I pa

rano

id?”

wha

t do

es t

he

patie

nt m

ean

by p

aran

oid?

Wha

t m

ight

be

the

subt

ext

to t

he p

atie

nt’s

que

stio

ns?

Whe

n ex

plai

ning

psy

chos

is, d

on’t

ove

rload

the

pat

ient

with

info

rmat

ion

–att

end

to t

he p

atie

nt’s

con

cern

s.

Repl

ace

jarg

on (e

.g. p

rogn

osis

, mul

tifac

toria

l) w

ith la

y ph

rase

s.

If yo

u do

n’t

know

the

pre

cise

info

rmat

ion

the

patie

nt is

look

ing

for,

say

you

will

find

out

and

tal

k ab

out

it th

e ne

xt t

ime

you

mee

t.

Hav

e a

mod

el t

o w

ork

with

for

exp

lain

ing

patie

nt’s

pro

blem

s –

don’

t sa

y

“The

psy

chol

ogis

t or

you

r nu

rse

will

tal

k ab

out

that

”. Y

ou m

ight

say

wha

t

they

’ve

rais

ed is

impo

rtan

t an

d yo

u’ll

shar

e th

is c

onve

rsat

ion

with

oth

er

mem

bers

of

the

team

.

If yo

u kn

ow t

here

is n

o de

finiti

ve a

nsw

er t

o th

e qu

estio

n th

e pa

tient

ask

s,

then

be

hone

st -

exp

lain

tha

t m

any

thin

gs r

emai

n un

know

n bu

t w

hat

is

know

n is

.....

”.

Hel

pfu

l ph

rase

s fr

om

ro

le-p

lays

:

“It

is g

ood

that

you

are

ask

ing

thes

e qu

estio

ns a

nd t

ryin

g to

und

erst

and

this”

“Wha

t st

oppe

d yo

u?”

(obe

ying

ord

ers

to h

arm

oth

ers)

“W

e ar

e he

re t

o he

lp y

ou w

ith t

his”

Hel

pfu

l no

rmal

isin

g p

hra

ses:

“You

don

’t h

ave

to w

orry

abo

ut it

..” –

ref

ram

e sp

ecifi

c re

leva

nt in

form

atio

n,

e.g

.”th

e ris

k is

a li

ttle

bit

high

er t

han

with

the

gen

eral

pop

ulat

ion”

.

HAN

DO

UT

3E: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

3

PAG

E 02

Page 236: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Helpful normalising phrases:

“You don’t have to worry about it..” – reframe specific relevant information, e.g .”the risk

is a little bit higher than with the general population”.

“I know some of my patients sometimes decide to cut down on medication, what’s

happening with you at the moment?” – rather than “ are you taking your medication?”

which can be difficult to say “no” to, give them permissions to tell you they may not be.

“Lots of people hear voices at some point in their lives. About 1 in 50 people hear voices.

Some famous, very successful people hear voices - the actor Anthony Hopkins, the

musician Brian Wilson from the Beach Boys.”

“Many people with schizophrenia now never have to go into hospital and are able to settle

down, work and have lasting relationships”

“You have an illness” ➞ Select depending on what the patient is asking: “It is not

uncommon for people to have experiences like the ones you’ve described. Our brains can

easily become paranoid (or depressed or …). While we don’t know exactly what causes

schizophrenia, it seems to be a combination of the genes we inherit, how our brain works

and stress. Most people (with schizophrenia) have a good outcome over time/ lead good

lives with the effective treatments that are available ”…….

”When we are under stress, these experiences can become worse. It’s okay to take

medication to help get them under control”

“Many people with schizophrenia now never have to go into hospital and are able to settle

down, work and have lasting relationships. For every 5 people with schizophrenia: 1 will

get better within 5 years of their first obvious symptoms, 3 will get better but may have

times that they will be worse again, and 1 will have troublesome symptoms for longer

periods of time”.

PAGE 100 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

“I k

now

som

e of

my

patie

nts

som

etim

es d

ecid

e to

cut

dow

n on

med

icat

ion,

wha

t’s

happ

enin

g w

ith y

ou a

t th

e m

omen

t?”

– ra

ther

tha

n “

are

you

taki

ng y

our

med

icat

ion?

” w

hich

can

be

diffi

cult

to s

ay “

no”

to, g

ive

them

perm

issi

ons

to t

ell y

ou t

hey

may

not

be.

“Lot

s of

peo

ple

hear

voi

ces

at s

ome

poin

t in

the

ir liv

es. A

bout

1 in

50

peop

le h

ear

voic

es. S

ome

fam

ous,

ver

y su

cces

sful

peo

ple

hear

voi

ces

- th

e

acto

r A

ntho

ny H

opki

ns, t

he m

usic

ian

Bria

n W

ilson

fro

m t

he B

each

Boy

s.”

“Man

y pe

ople

with

sch

izop

hren

ia n

ow n

ever

hav

e to

go

into

hos

pita

l and

are

able

to

sett

le d

own,

wor

k an

d ha

ve la

stin

g re

latio

nshi

ps”

“You

hav

e an

illn

ess”

➞ S

elec

t d

epen

din

g o

n w

hat

th

e p

atie

nt

is

aski

ng

: “It

is n

ot u

ncom

mon

for

peo

ple

to h

ave

expe

rienc

es li

ke t

he o

nes

you’

ve d

escr

ibed

. Our

bra

ins

can

easi

ly b

ecom

e pa

rano

id (o

r de

pres

sed

or

…).

Whi

le w

e do

n’t

know

exa

ctly

wha

t ca

uses

sch

izop

hren

ia, i

t se

ems

to

be a

com

bina

tion

of t

he g

enes

we

inhe

rit, h

ow o

ur b

rain

wor

ks a

nd s

tres

s.

Mos

t pe

ople

(with

sch

izop

hren

ia) h

ave

a go

od o

utco

me

over

tim

e/ le

ad

good

live

s w

ith t

he e

ffec

tive

trea

tmen

ts t

hat

are

avai

labl

e ”…

….

”Whe

n w

e ar

e un

der

stre

ss, t

hese

exp

erie

nces

can

bec

ome

wor

se. I

t’s

okay

to t

ake

med

icat

ion

to h

elp

get

them

und

er c

ontr

ol”

“Man

y pe

ople

with

sch

izop

hren

ia n

ow n

ever

hav

e to

go

into

hos

pita

l and

are

able

to

sett

le d

own,

wor

k an

d ha

ve la

stin

g re

latio

nshi

ps. F

or e

very

5

peop

le w

ith s

chiz

ophr

enia

: 1 w

ill g

et b

ette

r w

ithin

5 y

ears

of

thei

r fir

st

obvi

ous

sym

ptom

s, 3

will

get

bet

ter

but

may

hav

e tim

es t

hat

they

will

be

wor

se a

gain

, and

1 w

ill h

ave

trou

bles

ome

sym

ptom

s fo

r lo

nger

per

iods

of

time”

.

HAN

DO

UT

3E: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

3

PAG

E 03

Page 237: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

INFORMATION RESOURCES FOR PATIENTS AND CARERS

Royal College for psychiatrists: http://www.rcpsych.ac.uk/mentalhealthinfoforall/

problems/schizophrenia/schizophrenia.aspx

Rethink: http://www.rethink.org/about_mental_illness/peoples_experiences/your_

experiences/index.html

Mind: http://www.mind.org.uk/help

NHS: http://www.nhs.uk/Conditions/Psychosis/Pages/Introduction.aspx

Scottish recovery net: http://www.scottishrecovery.net/

HOW TO APPLY THE EAR-SKILLS

EAR-SKILLS EXPLAINING PSYCHOSIS

Explore • Explore patient’s understanding of illness/psychosis

• Explore patient’s need for information

Listen Actively • Acknowledge patient’s feeling & concerns about pschosis

Respond • Reassure by normalizing experiences/illness

• Reinforce patient’s positive development

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 101

“I k

now

som

e of

my

patie

nts

som

etim

es d

ecid

e to

cut

dow

n on

med

icat

ion,

wha

t’s

happ

enin

g w

ith y

ou a

t th

e m

omen

t?”

– ra

ther

tha

n “

are

you

taki

ng y

our

med

icat

ion?

” w

hich

can

be

diffi

cult

to s

ay “

no”

to, g

ive

them

perm

issi

ons

to t

ell y

ou t

hey

may

not

be.

“Lot

s of

peo

ple

hear

voi

ces

at s

ome

poin

t in

the

ir liv

es. A

bout

1 in

50

peop

le h

ear

voic

es. S

ome

fam

ous,

ver

y su

cces

sful

peo

ple

hear

voi

ces

- th

e

acto

r A

ntho

ny H

opki

ns, t

he m

usic

ian

Bria

n W

ilson

fro

m t

he B

each

Boy

s.”

“Man

y pe

ople

with

sch

izop

hren

ia n

ow n

ever

hav

e to

go

into

hos

pita

l and

are

able

to

sett

le d

own,

wor

k an

d ha

ve la

stin

g re

latio

nshi

ps”

“You

hav

e an

illn

ess”

➞ S

elec

t d

epen

din

g o

n w

hat

th

e p

atie

nt

is

aski

ng

: “It

is n

ot u

ncom

mon

for

peo

ple

to h

ave

expe

rienc

es li

ke t

he o

nes

you’

ve d

escr

ibed

. Our

bra

ins

can

easi

ly b

ecom

e pa

rano

id (o

r de

pres

sed

or

…).

Whi

le w

e do

n’t

know

exa

ctly

wha

t ca

uses

sch

izop

hren

ia, i

t se

ems

to

be a

com

bina

tion

of t

he g

enes

we

inhe

rit, h

ow o

ur b

rain

wor

ks a

nd s

tres

s.

Mos

t pe

ople

(with

sch

izop

hren

ia) h

ave

a go

od o

utco

me

over

tim

e/ le

ad

good

live

s w

ith t

he e

ffec

tive

trea

tmen

ts t

hat

are

avai

labl

e ”…

….

”Whe

n w

e ar

e un

der

stre

ss, t

hese

exp

erie

nces

can

bec

ome

wor

se. I

t’s

okay

to t

ake

med

icat

ion

to h

elp

get

them

und

er c

ontr

ol”

“Man

y pe

ople

with

sch

izop

hren

ia n

ow n

ever

hav

e to

go

into

hos

pita

l and

are

able

to

sett

le d

own,

wor

k an

d ha

ve la

stin

g re

latio

nshi

ps. F

or e

very

5

peop

le w

ith s

chiz

ophr

enia

: 1 w

ill g

et b

ette

r w

ithin

5 y

ears

of

thei

r fir

st

obvi

ous

sym

ptom

s, 3

will

get

bet

ter

but

may

hav

e tim

es t

hat

they

will

be

wor

se a

gain

, and

1 w

ill h

ave

trou

bles

ome

sym

ptom

s fo

r lo

nger

per

iods

of

time”

.

HAN

DO

UT

3E: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

3

PAG

E 03

INFO

RM

ATIO

N R

ESO

UR

CES

FO

R P

ATIE

NTS

AN

D C

AR

ERS

Ro

yal C

olle

ge

for

psy

chia

tris

ts: h

ttp:

//w

ww

.rcp

sych

.ac.

uk/

men

talh

ealth

info

fora

ll/pr

oble

ms/

schi

zoph

reni

a/sc

hizo

phre

nia.

aspx

Ret

hin

k: h

ttp:

//w

ww

.ret

hink

.org

/abo

ut_m

enta

l_ill

ness

/peo

ples

_

expe

rienc

es/y

our_

expe

rienc

es/in

dex.

htm

l

Min

d: h

ttp:

//w

ww

.min

d.or

g.uk

/hel

p

NH

S: h

ttp:

//w

ww

.nhs

.uk/

Con

ditio

ns/P

sych

osis

/Pag

es/In

trod

uctio

n.as

px

Sco

ttis

h r

eco

very

net

: htt

p://

ww

w.s

cott

ishr

ecov

ery.

net/

HO

W T

O A

PPLY

TH

E EA

R-S

KILL

S

EAR

-SKI

LLS

EXPL

AIN

ING

PSY

CH

OSI

S

Exp

lore

• E

xplo

re p

atie

nt’s

und

erst

andi

ng o

f illn

ess/

psyc

hosi

s

• E

xplo

re p

atie

nt’s

nee

d fo

r in

form

atio

n

List

en A

ctiv

ely

• A

ckno

wle

dge

pati

ent’

s fe

elin

g &

con

cern

s

abou

t psc

hosi

s

Res

pond

• R

eass

ure

by n

orm

aliz

ing

expe

rien

ces/

illne

ss

• R

einf

orce

pat

ient

’s p

osit

ive

deve

lopm

ent

HAN

DO

UT

3E: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

3

PAG

E 04

Page 238: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 102 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 239: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SESSION 4

Shared Decision Making

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 103

Page 240: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

PAGE 104 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 241: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SUMMARY

This session focuses on shared decision making, with a particular emphasis on decisions

around medication, as these are the most frequent decisions made in psychiatric

outpatient consultations.

In the first half, video clips of service user interviews on the importance of being involved

in decisions are presented. The participants learn the four steps of shared decision making

(GUNS). Step 1 (explain treatment options) and 2 (check understanding) are covered in

the first half and are introduced by video-clips of real consultations and then practised in

role-play with actors and video-feedback. The second half covers step 3 (negotiation) and

4 (summarise decision). This includes a discussion around pros and cons of discontinuing

anti-psychotic medication. Participants learn negotiation strategies, watch and discuss

video clips of these strategies and practise their use within role-play with actors and

video-feedback.

LEARNING OUTCOMES Awareness and skills for involving

patients in discussion

Negotiation strategies to deal with

disagreement

METHODS Didactic teaching; group discussion;

role-play with actors and video

feedback

MATERIALS Power-point presentation; flipchart;

video clips of real consultations;

teaching aids: role-play instructions; 2

video cameras, handout: skills booklet

OTHER INVOLVEMENT 2 actors for role-play

TIMING 3 hours

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 105

Page 242: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TIMETABLE AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEME

15 mins Slide 1 -2: Discussion of applying skills from session 3

Group discussion

1-2 DISCUSSION OF SKILLS IMPLEMENT-ATION

5 mins Slide 3: Focus of session 4 Didactic teaching/ Skills

3 INTRO-DUCTION

20 mins Slide 4:Decisions in psychiatric consultations

Slide 5: Types of decisions

Slide 6: Issues - antipsychotic medication

Slide 7-8: Watch 2 service-user clips

Slide 9: Steps of SDM (GUNS)

(Step 1 and 2 covered in first half, 3 and 4 in second)

Slide 10: Step 1: Giving treatment options

Slide 11: Discussion: What options to present

Slide 12: Video clip of giving options

Slide 13: Step 2 - Check understanding

Didactic teaching / Skills

4-13 SDM – STEP 1&2

45 mins Slide 14: Practise giving overview in role-play with actors and video feedback

Role-play with actors and video-feedback

14

Teaching aid I & II; handout 4a 2 video cameras and usb cables

10 mins Break 15

10mins Slide 16: Video clip ‘come off meds’

Slide 17: Discussion: Pros & Cons of coming off medication

Slide 18: Focus of second half (step 3 and 4)

Video consultation example

16-18 SDM – MEDICATION

10 mins Slide 19-27: Step 3: negotiation strategies

Watch double sided reflection clip

Slide 27-28: Difficult to agree on decision

Slide 29: Step 4 Review decisions

Slide 30: EAR-table

Didactic teaching/ Skills

19-30 SDM

STEP 3 & 4

50 mins Slide 31: Practise agenda setting step 3 and 4 in role-play with actors and video feedback

Role-play with actors and video-feedback

31

Teaching aid III & IV; handout 4b

Two video cameras

PAGE 106 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 243: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES

Session slides available on TEMPO DVD

TIME ACTIVITY LEARNING STYLE

SLIDES & MATERIAL

THEME

15 mins Slide 32

Present final EAR-table

Slide 33

Feedback on training

Interactive didactic teaching

32-33 FEEDBACK & ACTION PLANNING

5 mins Slide 34: Complete the post-training self-appraisal questionnaire

Slide 35

Hand out final skills booklet

Final action setting

Offer and schedule individualized feedback session!

Slide 36: Final action setting

Action planning

34

Handout 4c:

Handout 4d Final booklet

3 hrs End. 36

TEMPO  

Session  4  Shared  Decision  Making  (SDM)  

Individualised  feedback  

 Review  and  reflect  on  your  communica0on  

Session  4:  Shared  Decision  Making  

Involving  pa0ents  in  decisions   Nego0a0on  skills  

Session  3:  Empowering  the  pa0ent  

Agenda  SeMng   Explaining  Psychosis  

Session  2:  Techniques  for  working  with  symptoms  

Responding  to  posi0ve  symptoms   Reframing  nega0ve  symptoms  

Session  1:  Understanding  the  pa0ent  with  psychosis  

Experiencing  Psychosis   EAR:  Explore  Listen  Ac0vely  Respond    

Ac0on  planning  -­‐  recap  

• What  2  skills  did  you  try?  • What  success  did  you  enjoy?  

• What  challenges  arose?  

Time  spent  on  medica0on  decisions:  2  minutes    

Slide 1

Slide 3

Slide 2

Slide 4

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 107

Page 244: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

Medica0on  decisions  •  Con0nue  with  same  medica0on  (26%)  •  Reduce  (19%)  •  Increase  (18%)    •  Add  a  further  medica0on  (16%)  

•  Stop  or  change  medica0on  (<10%)      

McCabe  et  al.  (2013)  Shared  decision-­‐making  in  ongoing  outpa4ent  psychiatric  treatment.  Pa0ent  Educa0on  and  Counseling.  

Service-­‐user  perspec0ve  

Shared  Decision  Making    GUNS    

1.  Give  Overview  of  Op0ons  

2.  Check  Understanding,  concerns  &  preference    

3.  Nego0ate  

4.  Summarise  decision  

For  discussion  

• What  op0ons  do  you  present  to  pa0ents?  • What  informa0on  should  be  presented  to  pa0ent  to  give  overview  and  make  an  informed  decision?  

•  If  you  were  in  the  situa0on,  what  informa0on  would  you  want?  

ALL  PATIENTS:  Medica0on  

1/3  pa0ents  do  not  take  advice    1/3  get  it  wrong  1/3  adhere  to  recommenda0ons  in  general  health  

(Pendleton,  1997)  

Service-­‐user  perspec0ve  

Step  1  –  Give  Overview  of  Op0ons  

•  Give  overview  of  all  treatment  op0ons,  including  the  op0on  of  “no  ac0on”  

•  Allows  the  pa0ent  to  get  an  overview  before  decision  is  made  •  Explain  the  pros  and  cons  of  op0ons  •  People  cannot  be  expected  to  share  in  decisions  if  they  are  

not  properly  informed  

One  op0on  could  be  that  xxx,  the  other  would  be  xx  XX    does  s0ll  have  the  same  side-­‐effects  as  other  medica0on,  so  we’d  have  to  weigh  that  in  a  balance  against  the  poten0al  improvements.  

Give  overview  of  op0ons    

Slide 5

Slide 7

Slide 9

Slide 11

Slide 6

Slide 8

Slide 10

Slide 12

PAGE 108 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 245: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step  2  –  Check  understanding,  concerns  &  preference    

– Preferred  level  of  involvement?    – Explore  pa0ent’s  expecta0ons  of  how  problem  might  be  managed    

– Check  P’s  understanding  of  op0ons  (differs  in  new  vs.  ongoing  pa0ents)  

– Ask  P  if  s/he  has  concerns  – Offer  opportunity  to  ask  ques0ons      

What  do  you  think  about  these  op0ons?  Did  you  have  some  ideas  about  what  you  wanted  to  do  with  your  medica0on?  Have  you  read  anything  about  it?  

Break!  

Discussing  medica0on  

• What  are  the  pros  and  cons  of  coming  off  medica0on?  

Step  3  -­‐  Nego0ate  

•  Nego0ate  a  treatment  op0on  – Exchange  views  about  op0ons  – Work  with  the  pa0ent’s  concerns    – Make  explicit  both  preferences  &  reasons  for  each  

What  do  you  think?  How  do  you  feel  about  this?  

Giving  overview  Role-­‐play  

•  SDM  step  1:  Give  an  overview  of  treatment  op0ons  

•  SDM  step  2:  Check  understanding,  concerns  and  preference  

Pa0ent  request  for  discon0nua0on  

Shared  Decision  Making    GUNS    

1.  Give  Overview  of  Op0ons  

2.  Check  Understanding,  concerns  &  preference    

3.  Nego0ate  

4.  Summarise  decision  

Force  might  appear  to  win  ini0ally  but  at  what  cost?  

Mee0ng  resistance  with  force  creates  more  resistance  

Slide 13

Slide 15

Slide 17

Slide 19

Slide 14

Slide 16

Slide 18

Slide 20

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 109

Page 246: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SLIDES CONTINUED

How  to  react  to  resistance  

• Think  about  being  in  a  discussion  (or  argument)  where  you  disagree  with  someone  (e.g.  in  work)  

•  In  case  of  different  views  and  disagreement  –  step  back!  

• By  stepping  back,  and  being  less  forceful,  the  other  person  is  more  likely  to  modify  posi0on  

Service-­‐user  perspec0ve  

STRATEGY  3:  Reflect  both  sides    

•  Double-­‐sided  Reflec0on    – Reflect  specific  pros  &  cons  – E.g.,  Reflect  both  a  current  statement  and  a  previous  contradictory  statement  at  the  same  0me  

We’re  in  a  bit  of  a  dilemma  here  aren’t  we:  on  the  one  hand  you  feel  that  xx,  and  on  the  other  hand  xx  

 Difficult  to  agree  on  decision  

– Contract  seMng    – We  both  feel  differently  about  this.  On  the  one  hand  I  can  see  you  are  concerned  about  x.  On  the  other  hand  I  am  concerned  about  x  so  perhaps  we  could  agree  to  try…  and  reassess  how  we  both  feel  at  the  next  appointment?  

– Sharing  responsibility,  Posi0ve  risk  taking    – Lets  recap.  You  would  like  to  ….  For  x  reasons  I  would  be  concerned  and  recommend  that  you….Do  you  see  a  way  we  can  reach  a  compromise?  

STRATEGY  1:  Allow  disagreement        

•  Give  permission  to  disagree  and  tell  you  nega0ve  things  that  the  pa0ent  thinks  you  don’t  want  to  hear  

•  This  helps  the  pa0ent  to  feel  respected  

I  know  some  of  my  pa0ents  some0mes  don’t  take  their  medica0on.  I  wonder  how  you  feel  about  this….?  

STRATEGY  2:  Don’t  do  a  ‘hard  sell’  

•  Don’t  ‘sell’  by  pushing  all  the  advantages  &  glossing/  ignoring  disadvantages  

•  Don’t  minimize  side  effects  –  ‘No  problems  with  the  medica0on?’    –  ‘The  side  effects  aren’t  intolerable,  are  they?’  

•  Posi0ve  sign  if  pa0ent  trusts  you  enough  to  be  nega0ve  

What  do  you  see  as  the  downsides?  

Double  sided  reflec0on  

Difficult  to  agree  on  decision  

– Open  disclosure    – I  don’t  feel  comfortable  in  this…  

– Agree  to  differ  in  opinion  to  leave  the  doors  open  for  future  discussion    – It’s  very  helpful  that  we’ve  had  this  discussion  although  we  see  things  differently.  

Slide 21

Slide 23

Slide 25

Slide 27

Slide 22

Slide 24

Slide 26

Slide 28

PAGE 110 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 247: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Step  4  –  Summarize  &  review  

•  Clarify  the  decision  made  

•  Arrange  a  review  of  decision  •  Decision  can  involve  deferring  or  accep0ng  that  0me  is  required  for  further  informa0on  to  be  obtained  &  to  reflect  

•  If  no  decision  reached,  decide  on  next  steps  Perhaps  you  want  to  think  about  it  a  bit  more?  Do  you  want  to  think  about  it  then?  Then  you’ll  just  let  me  know  next  0me.  We  could  talk  about  it  again  at  your  next  appointment?  

Nego0a0on  Role-­‐play  

•  SDM  step  3:  Nego0a0on    •  SDM  step  4:  Review  decision  

Feedback  on  training  programme  

Final  skills  booklet  

• Content:  – Learning  points,  helpful  phrases,  ac0on  plan,  EAR-­‐table  

The  End!  

SDM:  EAR  skills  

Shared  Decision  Making  

Explore   •   Explore  preference,  understanding  &  concern  regarding  treatment  &  op0ons  •   Explore  pa0ent’s  expecta0ons  of  how  problem  might  be  managed  • Explore  pa0ent’s  view    

Listen  Ac0vely   • Reflect  back  pa0ent’s  statements  • Check  pa0ent's  understanding  of  op0ons    

Respond   •   Show  support  by  working  with  pa0ent’s  concerns  •   Explain  treatment  op0ons  •   Step  back  and  be  less  forceful    •   Double  sided  reflec0on  •   Agree  to  differ  • Reach  compromise  &  review  decision  

Training  ques0onnaire  

•  Complete  the  post-­‐training  self-­‐assessment  ques0onnaire    

•  Fill  in  the  final  ac0on  seMng  form  and  consider  barriers  to  implementa0on.  

•  Arrange  individualised  feedback  session  

Ac0on  planning  •  Choose  two  of  skills  you  think  would  benefit  your  prac0ce  this  

week.  

1.  2.  How  important  is  it  to  you  to  use  this  in  your  prac0ce  in  the  next  week?  

                               

How  confident  are  you  that  you  will  use  it  in  your  prac0ce  in  the  next  week?  

Not  important  at  all   Extremely  important  

0   5   10  

Not  confident  at  all   Extremely  confident  

0   5   10  

Slide 29

Slide 31

Slide 33

Slide 35

Slide 37

Slide 30

Slide 32

Slide 34

Slide 36

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 111

Page 248: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID I: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 4 – GIVING OVERVIEW ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

This role-play will take place in groups of 2-3 psychiatrists with one

actor, one facilitator and one trainer. Each psychiatrist should have

a turn at doing the role-play. If there are 2 psychiatrists, allow 20

minutes per psychiatrist. If there are 3 psychiatrists, allow 15 minutes

per psychiatrist.

The scheduled time for this role-play is 45 minutes!

Give each psychiatrist the background information on the patient in the

scenario (see handout 4a).

PROCEDURE

See guidance for facilitators – role-play with simulated patient and

video-feedback

1. Ask observing psychiatrists to get pen and paper to take notes

during role-play.

2. Allow approx. 5 minutes for the first round of role-play.

3. Following this, ask for the participants’ self-reflection, i.e. ask

participants what went well, where they feel they had difficulty or

got stuck.

4. Ask the actor to provide in-role feedback.

5. Ask the other participants who were observing the role-play how

they perceived the role-play/the communication.

6. Offer your feedback, offer suggestions for alternative ways of

conducting the interview; provide suggestions on request from

the person conducting the interview; or supply a replacement

interviewer who can attempt to put any suggestions into effect.

AIM

Psychiatrists to

practise giving patient

an overview of

different treatment

options and to check

understanding.

This is quite a short

role-play. The focus

is on the psychiatrist

giving an overview of

different treatment

options and checking

understanding. By

the end of the role-

play, your patient

should have a good

understanding of

the options being

presented by the

psychiatrist. This

role-play is not about

negotiation or coming

to a decision about

which option to go for.

PAGE 112 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 249: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

Name: Linda/John

Setting: This is a 45 year-old unemployed woman/man who is living with her/his mother.

S/he is attending a 3-month routine outpatient consultation with her/his psychiatrist. S/he

has known her/his psychiatrist for 2 years and gets along quite well with him/her.

Patient’s presentation in the consultation: Lind/John has been feeling low, not sleeping

very well (waking in the middle of the night for a few hours) and feeling worried and

anxious for quite a while. S/he can’t identify any specific reasons for this.

Mental health history: Linda/John was diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia in her/

his twenties following a series of psychotic episodes, where s/he was afraid of being

poisoned. S/he has been hospitalized twice for 2 weeks in the last few years. Since s/he

has been on medication (Clozapine), her/his fear of being poisoned has been more or

less under control.

Patient’s current situation:

Linda/John’s paranoia is currently mostly under control but s/he is feeling low, depressed

and anxious.

Everything seems a bit grey for her/him at the moment. S/he doesn’t like leaving the

house, spends most of her/his time in bed and has stopped doing things that s/he used

to do (e.g. going shopping). Her/his mum is concerned about her/his mood.

Patient’s behavior in the consultation: Linda/John presents in a flat and tired way. S/

he seems low in mood. The psychiatrist will give an overview and explanation of the

treatment options. Linda/John needs to come away with a clear understanding of the

different options and the pros and cons of each. S/he may need to ask some questions to

clarify aspects e.g., what is it good for? What is the usual dose? What are the short and

long-term side effects? How would a combination of an antidepressant and antipsychotic

work? Etc.

Note: Real consultation examples (see Instructions for actors) should give the actor an idea of how psychiatrists and patients communicate in a similar situation.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 113

Page 250: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID II: INSTRUCTIONS FOR ACTORS

SESSION 3 – GIVING OVERVIEW ROLE-PLAY

PROCEDURE

This role-play takes place in front of the whole group. One psychiatrist

and patient will role-play at one time. Please take playing the patient

in turns (if more than one actor involved).

1. Role-play

2. Verbal feedback from you (in-role) and psychiatrist

3. Verbal feedback from group

4. Based on feedback, the facilitator highlights a particular point

in the role- play to focus on

5. Psychiatrist should have another go at this particular part of

the role-play

AIM

Psychiatrists to give

patient an overview

of different treatment

options and to check

understanding

This is quite a short

role-play. The focus is

on the psychiatrist

giving an overview of

different treatment

options and checking

understanding. By the

end of the role-play,

you should have a

good understanding

of the options being

presented by the

psychiatrist. This

role-play is not about

negotiation or coming

to a decision about

which option to go

for.

PAGE 114 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 251: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO:

Name: Linda/John

Setting: You are a 45 year-old unemployed woman/man and you are living with

your mother. You are attending a 3-month routine outpatient consultation with your

psychiatrist. You have known your psychiatrist for 2 years and you get along quite well.

Your presentation in the consultation: You have been feeling low, not sleeping very well

(waking in the middle of the night for a few hours) and feeling worried and anxious for

quite a while. You can’t identify any specific reasons for this.

Mental health history: You were diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia in your twenties

following a series of psychotic episodes, where you were afraid of being poisoned. You

have been hospitalized twice for 2 weeks in the last few years. Since you have been on

medication (Clozapine), your fear of being poisoned has been more or less under control.

Your current situation:

Your paranoia is currently mostly under control but you are feeling low, depressed

and anxious.

Everything seems a bit grey for you at the moment. You don’t like leaving the house,

you spend most of your time in bed and have stopped doing things that you used to do

(e.g. going shopping). Your mum is concerned about your mood.

Your behavior in the consultation: You are feeling flat and tired. You seem low mood. The

psychiatrist will give an overview and explanation of the treatment options. You need to

come away with a clear understanding of the different options and the pros and cons

of each. You may need to ask some questions to clarify aspects e.g., what is it good for?

What is the usual dose? What are the short and long-term side effects? How would a

combination of an antidepressant and antipsychotic work? Etc.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 115

Page 252: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

REAL CONSULTATION EXAMPLE

1ST ROLE-PLAY: SDM 1&2 – GIVING OPTIONS FOR PATIENT WITH DEPRESSION SYMPTOMS

P: Do you get depressed do you think?

P: Yes I do

C: Right

P: Yeah

C: Do you feel a bit low at the moment then (.)?

P: I do really yes

C: And how long do you think you’ve been feeling (.) like this then a couple of

months?

P: Um (2) a long time now

C: Mmm (2.6) I mean do you sometimes feel so (.) low that yo::u feel like you can’t

go on do you ever feel that (2.4) a bit hopeless about things or?

P: Yes I do

C: Do you

P: Yeah

C: (2.6) What makes you feel most hopeless then (1) what makes you feel (.)

P: (5.4) um (3) I uh I get a pain in my side

C: Right

P: Here ((patient shows doctor))

C: Yeah

P: And and up here

C: Yeah

P: And (.) in the mornings (.6) and that worries me wh- what I’m thinking is that (.)

I’ve got 2 I.T. clips [I’ve] had my gall bladder [removed]

C: [yeah] [yeah]

C: Yes

P: And (.) I feel that they’ve been placed for (.) to give me pain

PAGE 116 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 253: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

C: Right

P: And that they they shouldn’t be there

C: And then you (.) get (.) depressed because you (.) you worry about your physical

health [is] that right or you think that something’s going on and that it’ll get

worse and worse

P: [mmm]

P: mmm

C: Would that be

P: mmm

C: Right (2.2) what about your (.2) life in terms of (.2) where you live and (.2) what

you do every day or (.) the other aspects of your life are you generally happy with

things or?

P: °No not really°

C: (1) How would you like it to be different then?

P: um (1) I uh (.6) I’d l- I’d like (.) to be able to get up in the mornings and (.2)

perhaps go up into town quite early and um (.) perhaps (.) and I don’t even I don’t

even go for a walk doctor not when I’m home

C: [Right]

P: [I] don’t go out the house

C: No (.) so you feel very (.) °trapped° then

C: Say half a year ago (.4) would you go out for a walk then?

P: No

C: No so (.) that’s right there’s n- I I know when we’ve met before we’ve (.) talked a

little bit about how (.) you feel where you feel safe un (.) you s- you you feel safe

in your house but it also traps you would that be

P: mmm

C: Would that be (.) fair to say

C: Yes (.) [so when you]

P: [so that’s why] partly because I don’t go out really

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 117

Page 254: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

APPROX. 5 MINUTES LATER:

C: And what about do y- about trying a bit of antidepressant to see if that will (.)

boost your mood a bit

P: Um (.6) you see (.) the Kemadrin is about all I can cope with because (.) I get an

awful feeling in my tummy (.6) even when I take Kemadrin the I- it affects my

tummy

C: So you’d be worried about the antidepressant [affecting] your tummy

would you

P: [yes]

P: Yes

C: Do you want to think about an antidepressant then (patient name)

P: Yes I’ll think about it

C: If you (.) wanted to try one

P: mm

C: To see if that would (.) help lighten things as well (.) then you just let me know

and I’ll (.) get it [organized]

P: [alright] thanks very much

C: Is that alright

P: Yes thank you

PAGE 118 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 255: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 4A: INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICIPANTS

SESSION 4 – GIVING OVERVIEW ROLE-PLAY

This is Linda/John. She/he is 35 years old. You have known Linda for 2 years.

Linda/John was diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia in her twenties following a series of psychotic episodes. S/he has been hospitalized twice for 2 weeks in the last few years. Since s/he has been on anti-psychotic medication (Clozapine).

Linda/John has been feeling low, not sleeping very well (waking in the middle of the night for a few hours) and feeling worried and anxious for quite a while. S/he can’t identify any specific reasons for this.

Linda/Jonn’s paranoia is currently mostly under control but s/he is feeling low, depressed and anxious.

She/he is unemployed and is living with her mother.

Task: Give patient an overview of different treatment options and check understanding.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 119

Page 256: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID III: INSTRUCTIONS FOR FACILITATORS

SESSION 4 – NEGOTIATION ROLE-PLAY

PREPARATION

This role-play will take place in groups of 2-3 psychiatrists with one

actor, one facilitator and one trainer. Each psychiatrist should have

a turn at doing the role-play. If there are 2 psychiatrists, allow 20

minutes per psychiatrist. If there are 3 psychiatrists, allow 15 minutes

per psychiatrist.

The scheduled time for this role-play is 45 minutes!

Give each psychiatrist the background information on the patient in

the scenario (see handout 4b).

PROCEDURE

See guidance for facilitators – role-play with simulated patient and

video-feedback

1. Ask observing psychiatrists to get pen and paper to take notes

during role-play.

2. Allow approx. 5 minutes for the first round of role-play.

3. Following this, ask for the participants’ self-reflection, i.e. ask

participants what went well, where they feel they had difficulty

or got stuck.

4. Ask the actor to provide in-role feedback.

5. Ask the other participants who were observing the role-play

how they perceived the role-play/the communication.

6. Offer your feedback, offer suggestions for alternative ways of

conducting the interview; provide suggestions on request from

the person conducting the interview; or supply a replacement

interviewer who can attempt to put any suggestions into effect.

AIM

The goal is for

psychiatrists to

practise involving

patients in decision

making about

medication. This

role-play focuses

on discussing the

patient’s wish to

reduce (and in the

long term stop)

medication. The

patient should be

involved in the

decision making

process and the role-

play should end with

a decision.

Core skills

psychiatrists should

apply: explore why

patient wants to

reduce and in the

long-term stop

medication; present

their own perspective,

negotiate, come to a

decision and recap on

the decision.

The patient should

feel respected, heard

and involved

PAGE 120 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 257: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

Name: Linda/Matt

Setting: This is Linda/Matt . S/he is 28 years old and unemployed. S/he is still living with

her/his parents. S/he is attending a 3-month routine outpatient consultation with

her/his psychiatrist. S/he has been seeing this psychiatrist for 2 years within the

outpatient setting.

Patient’s presentation in the consultation: Linda/Matt is suffering from multiple side

effects (drowsiness, tiredness, poor concentration). Hence, s/he wants to get her meds

reduced or even come off medication completely in the long run.

Mental health history: Linda/Matt was diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia 3 years ago. S/he has had two

psychotic episodes, both of which led to a (voluntary) hospital admission for two weeks.

Ever since, s/he has been on anti-psychotic medication (Clozapine, 300mg daily).

Current situation:Linda/Matt is suffering from a variety of side effects, such as drowsiness, tiredness,

experiencing a ‘drunk-like feeling’ in the evenings (see transcript below), and

poor concentration.

S/he feels that the medication side effects are holding her/him back from having a

normal life. Hence, s/he wants to reduce her meds straight away and talk about coming

off medication completely in the long-term.

Although s/he is functioning quite well in her/his day-to-day life at the moment, s/he still

sometimes gets some ‘funny feelings’ (see transcripts below) that parts of her/his body

don’t belong to her (depersonalization). And sometimes s/he feels that her/his mum isn’t

her real mum (see real consultation transcript).

S/he tells the psychiatrist that s/he is trying to ignore these thoughts (as s/he is

worried that if s/he would admit to them, the psychiatrist would not agree to reduce

her/his meds)

Background: Linda/Matt is currently still living with her/his parents. S/he is planning to get her/his own

place with her partner, who s/he has been with for 3 months. S/he is very happy in this

new relationship and would like to get married next year.

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 121

Page 258: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Linda/Matt is not working at the moment but is looking into applying for a course at

College in the summer.

So all in all, s/he is very motivated to get her/his life ‘back on track’ and s/he feels that

s/he is not in need of medication anymore. If anything, the side effects (drowsiness,

tiredness, poor concentration) s/he suffers from are holding her/him back from doing so.

So the bottom the line is: S/he is functioning well and wants to get back to a normal life. S/he feels that the medication has helped, but now s/he doesn’t need it anymore, as s/he is well.

However, s/he does still have some psychotic symptoms: depersonalization and delusional thoughts regarding her mum. (So from the doctor’s perspective she is not 100% well and he/she would obviously be worried that Linda/Matt would get worse if s/he stops taking medication).

Patient’s behavior in the consultation: The psychiatrist will start off trying to convince her/him to stick to her/his current

treatment. Linda/Matt fights her/his case and tries to negotiate as much as possible. S/he

assures her/his psychiatrist that s/he will pay attention to any warning signs/symptoms of

a relapse. S/he makes clear that it is her/his own decision.

The whole dialogue is a discussion (see ‘real consultation example’) and her/his

disagreeing with the psychiatrist’ s recommendation to stick to the treatment. Although

s/he is not a very argumentative person, s/he is still quite persistent in a subtle way and

doesn’t give in too early.

PAGE 122 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 259: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

TEACHING AID IV: INSTRUCTIONS FOR ACTORS

SESSION 4 – NEGOTIATION ROLE-PLAY

PROCEDURE

This role-play takes place in front of the whole group. One psychiatrist

and patient will role-play at one time. Please take playing the patient

in turns (if more than one actor involved).

1. Role-play

2. Verbal feedback from you (in-role) and psychiatrist

3. Verbal feedback from group

4. Based on feedback, the facilitator highlights a particular point in

the role- play to focus on

5. Psychiatrist should have another go at this particular part of

the role-play

AIM

The aim is for

psychiatrists to

practise involving

patients in decision

making about

medication. This

role-play focuses

on discussing the

patient’s wish to

reduce (and in the

long term stop)

medication. The

patient should be

involved in the

decision making

process and the

role-play should end

with a decision.

Core skills psychiatrists

should apply: explore

why patient wants

to reduce and in

the long-term stop

medication; present

their own perspective,

negotiate, come to a

decision and recap on

the decision

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 123

Page 260: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SCENARIO

Setting: You are 28 years old and unemployed. You are currently still living with your parents.

Today, you are attending your quarterly, routine outpatient consultation with your

psychiatrist. You have been seeing this psychiatrist for two years within the outpatient

setting.

Your presentation in the consultation: You are suffering from multiple side-effects,

including drowsiness, tiredness and poor concentration. You want to get your meds

reduced or even come off your medication completely in the long run.

Mental health history: You were diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia three years ago. You have had two

psychotic episodes, both of which lead to a voluntary hospital admission for two weeks.

Ever since, you have been on anti-psychotic medication (Clozapine, 300mg daily).

Current situation:You are suffering from a variety of side effects, such as drowsiness, tiredness,

experiencing a ‘drunk-like feeling’ in the evenings (see transcript below), and poor

concentration. What is the difference between presentation and current situation?

You feel that the medication side effects are holding you back from having a normal

life. Hence, you want to reduce your meds straight away and talk about coming off

medication completely in the long-term.

Although you are functioning quite well in your day-to-day life at the moment, you

still sometimes get some ‘funny feelings’ (see transcripts below) that parts of your body

don’t belong to you. And sometimes you feel that your mum isn’t your real mum (see

transcript below).

You tell the psychiatrists that you are trying to ignore these thoughts (as you are worried

that if you would admit to them, he/she would not agree to reduce your meds)

Background: You are currently still living with your parents. You are planning to get your own place

with your partner, who you have been with for 3 months. You are very happy in this new

relationship and you would like to get married next year.

You are not working at the moment but you are looking into applying for a course at

College in the summer.

PAGE 124 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 261: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

So all in all, you are very motivated to get your life ‘back on track’ and you feel that you

are not in need of any medication anymore. If anything, the side effects (drowsiness,

tiredness, poor concentration) you suffer from are holding you back from doing so.

So the bottom line is: You’re functioning well and want to get back to a normal life. You feel that the medication has helped you, but now you don’t need it anymore, as you are well.

However, you do still have some psychotic symptoms: depersonalization and delusional thoughts regarding your mum. (So from the doctor’s perspective you are not 100% well and he would obviously be worried that you would get worse if you stop taking medication).

Your behavior in the consultation: The psychiatrist will start off trying to convince

you to stick to your current treatment. You fight your case and try to negotiate as much

as possible. You assure your psychiatrist that you will pay attention to any warning signs/

symptoms of a relapse. You make clear that it is your own decision.

The whole dialogue is a discussion (see ‘real consultation example’ below) and you

disagree with your psychiatrist’ s recommendation to stick to your treatment. Although

you are not a very argumentative person, you are still quite persistent in a more subtle

way and don’t give in too early.

REAL CONSULTATION EXAMPLE

This might give you an idea of how patients typically discuss and negotiate the medication-issue with their psychiatrist (for role-play 2). (Note that there is a carer present at this consultation; this is not relevant for the role play.)

C = ClinicianP = PatientA = Carer

C: So how’s how’s life been (.) [Brian]

P: [I w-] d- I kind of s- um (.) well life’s fine (.) just that I’m really not enjoying this

medication

C: Right

P: It’s (.) it’s a bit at nights it’s um (.) uncomfortable

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 125

Page 262: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

C: At nights (.) [you say]

P: [Yeah I] take it at night but (.4) sometimes I have to (.) um (.) do things to (.) get

rid of (.) get rid of the uh (.) effects of it like (.) drink wine ((patient laughs)) no it

really it was really messing me up its harsh it’s like um (.) you can’t concentrate

you have to (.) like I’ll drink red bull or something to get away the uh (.) effects of

it it’s (.) really nasty it’s like hard eating and stuff like that

C: Sorry so let me just (.) clarify (.) what the side effects are is it

P: No the effects of (.) when I take it it’s l- its like (.) um (.4) it’s like being drunk (.)

but

C: Right

P: Well it’s hard to explain it’s uh (.) it’s uncomfortable

C: It’s like being drunk do you mean (.8) that you feel sedated it [makes] you feel

sleepy

P: [yeah]

P: Not sleepy it’s like um (.4) it’s really uncomfortable (.4) it’s like you can feel it in

your throat and um

C: Right

P: It’s (.) it’s horrible

C: And (.6) you said a bit like being drunk coz when [you’re] drunk you’re sort of not

with it are y- is [it]

P: [yeah]

P: [No] it’s it’s worse than being (.) well [its] uh (.6) if drunk getting drunk’s being

bad (.) and it’s uh (.) it’s really bad

C: [mm]

C: Right ok (.) and you say you feel it in your throat do you mean there’s a (.) taste in

your throat or a constriction or [a pain]

P: [No it’s] just like at- um (.8) I dunno it’s hard to describe it (.) its just u

comfortable

C: Right=

A: =Sometimes you say you’ve (.) you can feel it burning your chest don’t you

[sometimes]

P: [Yeah]

C: Burning (.) burning chest

PAGE 126 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 263: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

A: Mmm (.) [sort] [of when you]-

C: [Right]

P: [Not burning] just just really uncomfortable

A: [Aft-] that (.) and that’s almost straight after you’ve taken your medication isn’t it

C: [And]

P: Yeah

C: Right (.) ok

A: But uh (.) and also you find it difficult eating

P: Yeah (.) it’s horrible eating and it’s (.) [quite]

A: [Swallowing] I think (.) sort of still [a lot of]

C: [Is that] right Brian?

P: Yeah (.) it’s it’s um how do ºI put itº (2.8) um

C: Is it [hard to swallow or] =I wake up in the morning after (.) as soon as I wake up

I >feel have a couple of like< red bull or like Perdys to drink coz it’s (.) I just feel so

groggy when I wake up

C: So you feel groggy when you wake up?

P: yeah [it’s uh] (.) its just about bearable

C: [mm]

C: ok

A: his speech is (.) slurred as well [I]

P: [it] makes you mutter

C: [sorry what] was that last bit

A: [it’s funny-]

P: it makes you mutter

C: mutter

P: [un]

A: slurry speech if he’s on [the] phone I find it quite difficult [to] understand what

he’s [saying] when he’s on the phone ºyou sort of uhº (.) [it’s]

C: [right] [yeah]

C: [so] that grogginess sounds [like] it is a sedative but it’s a bit more than that it’s

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 127

Page 264: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

also (.) makes you feel uncomfortable and it affects [your] throat and ch- chest

and [your stomach] right

A: [yeah]

P: [yeah] [pretty horrible]

P: I think it’s coz I’m taking it all at night (.) and I’m like winding down it might be (.)

I’m taking 300mg at night

C: yeah

P: but uh (.) it’s it’s not nice

A: the Defocate is completely stopped now he’s completely stopped Defocate and

that’s been for some time [hasn’t] it [what’s] it [about couple of] months

P: [mm] [couple of months]

C: [right]

C: so (.) you’re just on the Clozapine

P: yeah

C: right (.4) um and can you remember the dose of your Clozapine

P: yeah 300 milligrams

C: all all at night

A: mmm

P: yeah

C: and you think (.) that taking it all at night is a problem

P: I dunno um (.) I really wanted to get it reduced because I feel completely happy

um (.) stopping my meds (.) cos I’ve (.) well I’ve been on different meds now for

quite a while haven’t I about 2 years (.4) and I feel happy c- stopping them

C: .hhh but one thing is (.) I mean f- can I ask about your mental health how how do

you feel in your mental health

P: fine I’m completely well

C: would you say you’re [completely] back to your normal self

P: [I’m happy]

P: yeah (.) yeah

C: can I ask do you see or hear anything other people can’t see or hear

PAGE 128 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 265: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

P: nope

[and] (.) would you say Brian’s [back] to his normal self

A: [mm] [mm]

A: he’s the best he’s been for a long long time

C: since you were 14 [or something] [yeah]

A: [three yeah] absolutely three or [four] years (.4) yeah absolutely

C: and [I I’m a little bit] I I’m a little bit anxious about you stopping your medication

that you’d put yourself a bit at risk (.8) I think (1) my (.) my advice to you I’m not

going to ma- I can’t force you to take it or whatever (.) my advice to you is either

to reduce it very slightly (.) or to separate it between the morning and the evening

A: [huge progress]

P: well I thought that but then (.) um I think it’s just the smallest amount that does it

(.) its just um (.) [it’s] not nice

A: [I I think]

A: [I I] think what Brian’s finding difficult is now he will end up (.) he he (.) he

needs to move on to the next stage of life and [that’s] what he’s finding difficult

because (.) I think the meds (.4) he finds physically draining if he does anything

physical he will (.) absolutely break out into a sweat and (.) you can see it does

take a bit more effort than (.) [you] or I doing something

C: [mm] [yeah] [mm]

C: yeah

A: um (.4) he’s just applied for an apprenticeship up on Hartmoor which had the

um (.) when was that Friday we went to that Tuesday wasn’t it

P: Tuesday

C: yeah

A: he needs (.) but if he wants to be doing something like that (.) 37 hours a

week I think he’s going to (.) s- struggle

C: the risk is [yeah]

A: I know it’s (.) the [risk] it’s a r- it’s a real difficult one [isn’t it]

C: [it’s a] real difficult [one because the] risk is if I stop your medication or reduce

your medication or reduce you too fast and your just going to become ill again

(.4) you’ll be going backwards

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 129

Page 266: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

A: [it is I know]

P: [well I wu- I wu-] I won’t I’ll be f- (.) I think I’ll be fine (.) honestly

C: [back to that]

C: but I understand that you

P: well if I can stop it then I would because it’s (.) it’s not needed anymore

C: .hhh

P: because I think that

C: how about (.) initially (.4) I appreciate your saying it’s too much (.) if we just go

down to 250 (.6) and we (.) we go down gradually

P: I’d prefer it if we go down to 200

A: ((chuckles))

C: [that’s quite] a big jump honestly

P: [coz two]

P: yeah if [two it’d be a bit] more it’d be better um taking two

C: [coz you wan-]

C: .hhh (2)

A: the family support team are talking about doing some (.6) oh what do they call it

(.6) some (.) exercising by a whereby he can start to recognize (.4) [early] warning

symptoms

C: [yeah]

C: early [ss::s- (.) um (.)]

P: [I know that anyway]

A: do you

C: s- seeing early signs of [relapse re-] relapse plan or [whatever yeah]

A: [yes yeah] [plan yeah]

A: have you done any of that with Sara

P: no I don’t need to

A: oh ok

C: .hhh (.) how about 250 (.) and [then] if you’re if you’re ok we’ll go down to 200

P: um [200]

PAGE 130 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 267: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

C: after a month if things are ok you go down to 200

P: I’d prefer to go to 200 straight away coz (.) that extra (.) that’s (.) like (.) the pill

would uh (.) be a lot better wouldn’t it

C: ok (.6) if we go down to 200

P: I’ll do it

C: but do you promise me that if you get any problems you’ll go back up

P: ok (.2) yeah (.2) I feel um confident that I won’t have any more problems

so

C: the thing I- I I I appreciate you’re feeling (.) good and I can see you’re uh you’re

the best I’ve ever seen (.4) but it might be that the medications helping that to

happen (.) Brian and that’s where you got to be a bit careful (.) and-

P: I think I I think I’ll be fine going down to 200

C: I’m you know obviously I don’t want to (.) my advice is 250 if you insist on 200 I’ll

g- I’ll go with that coz I don’t want you just to say well [stuff Dr. Green or] stuff it

P: [no I’ll put it back up]

P: [I’ll put it] back up to 300 if I I feel like I’m [getting] pulled back

C: [you know] [ok]

A: I think also you know (.4) he’s at home (.) we can keep an eye on him [I] mean

you know=

C: =so you feel ok about it

A: I feel [I feel comfortable with it]

P: [you’ll know straight] away if I’m feeling unwell [again]

A: [I I I] absolutely would (.4) you know he’s close to his sister he’s he’s around the

place all the time (.) [I’m happy]

P: [I don’t like] my sister’s boyfriend ((laughs))

A: [°that’s got] nothing to do with it°

C: [let’s go]

C: let’s go for 200 then [Brian] I’ll go with what your asking for but please please

please if there are any signs of problems (.) coz I- I’m just desperate for you to (.8)

be well and

P: [yeah]

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 131

Page 268: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 4B: INSTRUCTIONS FOR PARTICIPANTS

SESSION 4 – NEGOTIATION ROLE-PLAY

This is Linda/Matt. S/he is 28 years old and unemployed. S/he is still living with her/his parents. S/he is attending a 3-month routine outpatient consultation at your outpatient clinic. You have known her/him for 2 years.

Linda/Matt was diagnosed with paranoid schizophrenia 3 years ago. S/he has had two psychotic episodes, both of which led to a (voluntary) hospital admission for two weeks. Ever since, s/he has been on anti-psychotic medication (Clozapine, 300mg daily).

Task: Practise involving patients in decision making about medication. The role-play should end with a decision.

Core skills you should apply: explore why patient wants to reduce and in the long-term stop medication; present your own perspective, negotiate, come to a decision and recap on the decision.

The patient should feel respected, heard and involved.

PAGE 132 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 269: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 4C: POST-TRAINING SELF-APPRAISAL QUESTIONNAIRE

1. I find it easy to consider the patient’s

perspective on voices and delusions.

2. I feel comfortable working with patients

with negative symptoms.

3. I feel comfortable working with beliefs

about voices and delusions.

4. I feel comfortable asking patients what

they want to talk about and setting an

agenda early in the consultation.

5. I feel comfortable reassuring patients.

6. I feel comfortable explaining psychotic

illness to patients.

7. I feel comfortable asking patients if

they need information and giving them

information.

8. I feel comfortable asking patients what

they don’t like about their treatment

(e.g. medication).

9. I feel comfortable offering patients

choices about treatment and asking

about their concerns and preferences.

10. I feel comfortable dealing with

disagreements.

1

NOT AT ALL VERY

5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

1 5 10

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 133

Page 270: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

HANDOUT 4D: FINAL SKILLS BOOKLET

COMMUNICATION SKILLS IN PSYCHOSIS

EAR SKILLS:

ExploreListen Actively (Show patient s/he has been heard)Respond (Reassure and support)

EXPLORE:

“How have you been?” “How are you in yourself?”

“What is that like for you?” “How does that leave you feeling?”

“Can you explain what you mean by..?”

Avoid leading questions: “the voices don’t bother you do they?”

Clarify understanding: “so what you mean is..”

RESPOND:

Reassure, support and reinforce how the patient manages and the positive steps they have taken

“It sounds like you are dealing with it very well”

“I’m impressed by how you..” “You have made great progress in..”

LISTEN ACTIVELY:

Skills that facilitate the patient to say more

Allow the patient to complete statements without interruption.

Leave time for the patient to think before answering.

Encourage. Facilitate listening nonverbally. Pay attention to patients’ prompts.

Paraphrase and echo patients’ statements.

Acknowledging patients’ concerns Including empathetic reflection:

“You seem (frustrated, worried, sad)” “It sounds like that is very hard/distressing”

“It’s good that you are asking these questions and trying to understand this”

Summarise periodically, invite patient to revise

“Can I check that I have understood? What you have told me is..”

“Can I summarise so far?” “Have I got that right?”

PAGE 134 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

EAR

SKI

LLS:

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 01

EXPL

OR

E:

“How

hav

e yo

u be

en?”

“H

ow a

re y

ou in

you

rsel

f?”

“Wha

t is

tha

t lik

e fo

r you

?”

“How

doe

s th

at le

ave

you

feel

ing?

“Can

you

exp

lain

wha

t

you

mea

n by

....?

Avo

id le

adin

g qu

estio

ns: “

the

voic

es d

on’t

bot

her y

ou d

o th

ey?”

Cla

rify

und

erst

andi

ng: “

so w

hat

yo

u m

ean

is...

.”

RES

PO

ND

:

(Rea

ssur

e an

d su

ppor

t)

Rea

ssur

e, s

uppo

rt a

nd r

einf

orce

ho

w t

he p

atie

nt m

anag

es a

nd t

he

posi

tive

step

s th

ey h

ave

take

n

“It

soun

ds li

ke y

ou a

re d

ealin

g

wit

h it

very

wel

l”

“I’m

impr

esse

d by

how

you

..”

“You

hav

e m

ade

grea

t

prog

ress

in...

.”

LIST

EN A

CTI

VEL

Y:

(Sho

w p

atie

nt s/

he h

as b

een

hear

d)

Skill

s th

at fa

cilit

ate

the

patie

nt to

say

mor

e

Allo

w t

he p

atie

nt to

com

plet

e st

atem

ents

w

ithou

t int

erru

ptio

n.

Leav

e tim

e fo

r th

e pa

tient

to t

hink

bef

ore

answ

erin

g.

Enco

urag

e. F

acili

tate

list

enin

g no

nver

bally

. Pa

y at

tent

ion

to p

atie

nts’

pro

mpt

s.

Para

phra

se a

nd e

cho

patie

nts’

sta

tem

ents

.

Ack

now

ledg

ing

patie

nts’

con

cern

s

Incl

udin

g em

path

etic

refl

ectio

n:

“You

see

m (

frus

trat

ed, w

orri

ed, s

ad)”

“I

t so

unds

like

tha

t is

ver

y ha

rd/d

istr

essi

ng”

“It’

s go

od t

hat

you

are

aski

ng t

hese

que

stio

ns

and

tryi

ng t

o un

ders

tand

thi

s”

Sum

mar

ise

peri

odic

ally

, inv

ite p

atie

nt to

rev

ise

“Can

I ch

eck

that

I ha

ve u

nder

stoo

d?

Wha

t yo

u ha

ve t

old

me

is..”

“Can

I su

mm

aris

e so

far?

” “H

ave

I got

tha

t ri

ght?

COM

MU

NIC

ATIO

N S

KILL

S IN

PSY

CHO

SIS

TRAI

NIN

G –

SES

SIO

N 4

:

Page 271: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

AGENDA SETTING:

4 STEPS

STEP 1: PATIENT’S PRIORITIES

“When you were on your way here today did you have a particular topic in mind that you wanted to talk about with me?”

“What are the key things you would like us to focus on today?”

“What do you want to make sure happens before you leave here today?”

Recap on the concern raised, and then ask if there is anything else:

“Are there other things that you would like us to address today?”

STEP 2: OWN PRIORITIES

“I also have some things that I would like for us to discuss today including…”

“Before the end of our consultation I would like to discuss …… with you.”

“We have the time to discuss our main priorities, let’s focus on these and try to answer some of your questions.”

STEP 3: NEGOTIATE

“Let’s agree on the areas we want to focus on today.”

“For time reasons, we won’t be able to discuss all of these things today. We’ll keep that in mind to discuss next time.”

STEP 4: SIGNPOST & RECAP

‘Signpost’: show you are still planning to cover all agreed priorities

“We have discussed your housing situation, and we are going to discuss your medication in a little while. Before we do that, can you tell me a bit more about your side effects?”

Refer back to explicit agenda at the end of consultation and recap on the

issues covered.

“Today we have discussed… and agreed… In our next consultation we could come back to some of these issues, as well as others we have mentioned”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 135

AGEN

DA

SETT

ING

:

STEP

1: P

ATIE

NT’

S PR

IOR

ITIE

S

“Whe

n yo

u w

ere

on y

our

way

her

e to

day

did

you

have

a p

artic

ular

top

ic

in m

ind

that

you

wan

ted

to t

alk

abou

t w

ith m

e?”

“Wha

t ar

e th

e ke

y th

ings

you

wou

ld li

ke u

s to

foc

us o

n to

day?

“Wha

t do

you

wan

t to

mak

e su

re h

appe

ns b

efor

e yo

u le

ave

here

tod

ay?”

Reca

p on

the

con

cern

rai

sed,

and

the

n as

k if

ther

e is

any

thin

g el

se:

“Are

the

re o

ther

thi

ngs

that

you

wou

ld li

ke u

s to

add

ress

tod

ay?”

STEP

2: O

WN

PR

IOR

ITIE

S

“I a

lso

have

som

e th

ings

tha

t I w

ould

like

for

us

to d

iscu

ss t

oday

incl

udin

g…”

“Bef

ore

the

end

of o

ur c

onsu

ltatio

n I w

ould

like

to

disc

uss

……

with

you

.”

“We

have

the

tim

e to

dis

cuss

our

mai

n pr

iorit

ies,

let’

s fo

cus

on t

hese

and

tr

y to

ans

wer

som

e of

you

r qu

estio

ns.”

STEP

3: N

EGO

TIAT

E

“Let

’s a

gree

on

the

area

s w

e w

ant

to f

ocus

on

toda

y.”

“For

tim

e re

ason

s, w

e w

on’t

be

able

to

disc

uss

all o

f th

ese

thin

gs t

oday

. W

e’ll

keep

tha

t in

min

d to

dis

cuss

nex

t tim

e.”

STEP

4: S

IGN

PO

ST &

REC

AP

‘Sig

npos

t’: s

how

you

are

stil

l pla

nnin

g to

cov

er a

ll ag

reed

prio

ritie

s

“We

have

dis

cuss

ed y

our

hous

ing

situ

atio

n, a

nd w

e ar

e go

ing

to d

iscu

ss

your

med

icat

ion

in a

litt

le w

hile

. Bef

ore

we

do t

hat,

can

you

tel

l me

a

bit

mor

e ab

out

your

sid

e ef

fect

s?”

Refe

r ba

ck t

o ex

plic

it ag

enda

at

the

end

of c

onsu

ltatio

n an

d re

cap

on

the

issu

es c

over

ed.

“Tod

ay w

e ha

ve d

iscu

ssed

… a

nd a

gree

d… In

our

nex

t co

nsul

tatio

n

we

coul

d co

me

back

to

som

e of

the

se is

sues

, as

wel

l as

othe

rs w

e

have

men

tione

d”

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 02

Page 272: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

WORKING WITH POSITIVE SYMPTOMS:

DELUSIONS:

Draw out the person’s story

When did it start? What was happening when this started to happen? What reinforced the belief?

Get across that you’re interested. Not to demonstrate they’re wrong, and not in a critical

way – rather, in an exploratory way:

‘I’d like to understand why you believe this….I’m really interested”.

“Can you keep going with the story? It’s giving me some understanding of how you’ve become concerned.”

If patient is becoming distressed, step back “we can leave this for now, and come back to it.”

GOT THE STORY – NOW WHAT?

Closing down the conversation:

The time talking/engaging – that in itself is a goal.

“It’s been extremely useful for us to invest this time in this way and for me to hear what your concerns are, how they developed, and there is a lot to talk about, I’d like it if we could continue the next time we meet. Are there any particular things we need to check before we finish today?”

PATIENT ASKS: “DO YOU BELIEVE ME?”

“Whether I believe you or not, it’s important to talk about this.”

“What you’ve told me at the moment, I’m not fully convinced. I think we need to talk about this more.” “I think I can see how you came to believe this. Is there anything you can do over the next few months that would help us in this discussion?”

“Can we set this aside for the moment and go back a bit to help me understand?”

PAGE 136 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

WO

RKIN

G W

ITH

PO

SITI

VE S

YMPT

OM

S:

DEL

USI

ON

S:

Dra

w o

ut t

he p

erso

n’s

stor

y

Wh

en d

id it

sta

rt?

Wh

at w

as h

app

enin

g w

hen

th

is s

tart

ed t

o

hap

pen

? W

hat

rei

nfo

rced

th

e b

elie

f?

Get

acr

oss

that

you

’re in

tere

sted

. Not

to

dem

onst

rate

the

y’re

wro

ng, a

nd

not

in a

crit

ical

way

– r

athe

r, in

an

expl

orat

ory

way

:

“I’d

like

to

unde

rsta

nd w

hy y

ou b

elie

ve t

his…

.I’m

rea

lly in

tere

sted

”.

“Can

you

kee

p go

ing

with

the

sto

ry?

It’s

giv

ing

me

som

e un

ders

tand

ing

of

how

you

’ve

beco

me

conc

erne

d.”

If pa

tient

is b

ecom

ing

dist

ress

ed, s

tep

back

“w

e ca

n le

ave

this

for

now

, an

d co

me

back

to

it.”

GO

T TH

E ST

OR

Y –

NO

W W

HAT

?

Clo

sin

g d

ow

n t

he

con

vers

atio

n: T

he t

ime

talk

ing

/eng

agin

g –

that

in

itsel

f is

a g

oal.

“It’

s be

en e

xtre

mel

y us

eful

for

us

to in

vest

thi

s tim

e in

thi

s w

ay a

nd f

or m

e to

hea

r w

hat

your

con

cern

s ar

e, h

ow t

hey

deve

lope

d, a

nd t

here

is a

lot

to t

alk

abou

t, I’

d lik

e it

if w

e co

uld

cont

inue

the

nex

t tim

e w

e m

eet.

Are

th

ere

any

part

icul

ar t

hing

s w

e ne

ed t

o ch

eck

befo

re w

e fin

ish

toda

y?”

PATI

ENT

ASK

S: “

DO

YO

U B

ELIE

VE

ME?

“Whe

ther

I be

lieve

you

or

not,

it’s

impo

rtan

t to

tal

k ab

out

this

.”

“Wha

t yo

u’ve

tol

d m

e at

the

mom

ent,

I’m

not

ful

ly c

onvi

nced

. I t

hink

we

need

to

talk

abo

ut t

his

mor

e.”

“I t

hink

I ca

n se

e ho

w y

ou c

ame

to b

elie

ve

this

. Is

ther

e an

ythi

ng y

ou c

an d

o ov

er t

he n

ext

few

mon

ths

that

wou

ld

help

us

in t

his

disc

ussi

on?”

“Can

we

set

this

asi

de f

or t

he m

omen

t an

d go

bac

k a

bit

to h

elp

me

unde

rsta

nd?”

Avo

id n

egat

ive

fram

ing

: not

‘bu

t I’m

afr

aid

we

have

to

wra

p up

for

tod

ay’

– fr

ame

posi

tivel

y “t

his

is h

as b

een

real

ly h

elpf

ul a

nd

whe

n yo

u co

me

back

the

next

tim

e”

Elic

itin

g b

elie

fs a

bo

ut

voic

es: T

he p

atie

nt n

eeds

to

unde

rsta

nd t

hat

you

unde

rsta

nd t

hey

are

hear

ing

voic

es. I

deal

ly, d

evel

op s

ome

awar

enes

s

that

the

y m

ay b

e so

met

hing

to

do w

ith t

hem

. Thi

s is

key

for

inte

rven

tions

,

med

icat

ion,

cop

ing

stra

tegi

es, w

hich

are

not

rel

evan

t if

noth

ing

to d

o

with

the

m.

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 03

Page 273: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

Avoid negative framing: not ‘but I’m afraid we have to wrap up for today’ – frame

positively “this is has been really helpful and when you come back the next time”

Eliciting beliefs about voices: The patient needs to understand that you understand

they are hearing voices. Ideally, develop some awareness that they may be something to

do with them. This is key for interventions, medication, coping strategies, which are not

relevant if nothing to do with them.

CHECKLIST FOR DISCUSSION:

1. SOCRATIC DIALOGUE

1. Discuss phenomena: “What is the experience like for you?” “Someone speaking to you like I’m doing now?” “Louder or whispered?” “Inside or outside your head?”

2. Explore individuality of perception: “Can anybody else hear what is said?”

If appropriate, suggest a test of the voices:“Next time you hear them, try and record them – see if you hear them back.”

3. Discover beliefs about origin: "Why do you think others can’t hear them?"

4. Explore doubts: “Are you sure about where the voices come from?”

2. NORMALISING ALTERNATIVES.

1. Normalise: explain that voices can occur with sleep deprivation and

other stressful circumstances: e.g. bereavement, hostages,

dreaming.

“Voices could happen to anybody” “About 1 in 50 people hear voices, including famous and successful people, e.g. actor Anthony Hopkins”

2. Understand the voices: the mind is hearing things, not coming through the ears,

but coming from your mind:

“..like what happens to everyone when we dream”

3. Understand the problem: “It’s not the voices that are the problem – it’s how they affect you”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 137

CHEC

KLIS

T FO

R D

ISCU

SSIO

N:

1. S

OC

RAT

IC D

IALO

GU

E

1. D

iscu

ss p

hen

om

ena

:

“Wha

t is

the

exp

erie

nce

like

for

you?

” “S

omeo

ne s

peak

ing

to y

ou li

ke I’

m d

oing

now

?”

“L

oude

r or

whi

sper

ed?”

“In

side

or

outs

ide

your

hea

d?”

2. E

xplo

re in

div

idu

alit

y o

f p

erce

pti

on

: “C

an a

nybo

dy e

lse

hear

wha

t is

sai

d?”

If ap

prop

riate

, sug

gest

a t

est

of t

he v

oice

s: “

Nex

t tim

e yo

u he

ar t

hem

, try

an

d re

cord

the

m –

see

if y

ou h

ear

them

bac

k.”

3. D

isco

ver

bel

iefs

ab

ou

t o

rig

in:

“Why

do

you

thin

k ot

hers

can

’t h

ear

them

?”

4. E

xplo

re d

ou

bts

: “A

re y

ou s

ure

abou

t w

here

the

voi

ces

com

e fr

om?”

2. N

OR

MA

LISI

NG

ALT

ERN

ATIV

ES.

1. N

orm

alis

e:

expl

ain

that

voi

ces

can

occu

r w

ith s

leep

dep

rivat

ion

and

othe

r st

ress

ful c

ircum

stan

ces:

e.g

. ber

eave

men

t, h

osta

ges,

dre

amin

g.

“Voi

ces

coul

d ha

ppen

to

anyb

ody”

“Abo

ut 1

in 5

0 pe

ople

hea

r vo

ices

, inc

ludi

ng f

amou

s an

d su

cces

sful

peo

ple,

e.

g. a

ctor

Ant

hony

Hop

kins

2. U

nd

erst

and

th

e vo

ices

: the

min

d is

hea

ring

thin

gs, n

ot c

omin

g

thro

ugh

the

ears

, but

com

ing

from

you

r m

ind

: “..l

ike

wha

t ha

ppen

s to

ev

eryo

ne w

hen

we

drea

m”

3. U

nd

erst

and

th

e p

rob

lem

: “It

’s n

ot t

he v

oice

s th

at a

re t

he p

robl

em –

it’

s ho

w t

hey

affe

ct y

ou”

3. W

EIG

H P

RO

S &

CO

NS

OF

WH

AT V

OIC

ES S

AY.

1. E

xplo

re t

he

con

ten

t o

f th

e vo

ices

: “C

an y

ou t

ell m

e th

e so

rt o

f th

ing

the

voic

es s

ay?”

“W

hy d

o yo

u th

ink

they

’re s

ayin

g th

at?”

2. H

elp

pat

ien

t to

rec

og

nis

e th

at t

he

voic

es a

re r

elat

ed t

o t

hem

. “I

s th

ere

any

trut

h to

tha

t?”

D

o yo

u th

ink

you’

re t

hat

bad?

” “W

hat

is it

tha

t’s

bad?

“Wha

t ar

e th

e go

od t

hing

s ab

out

you?

3. R

emin

d t

hem

we

all h

ave

po

siti

ves

and

neg

ativ

es: w

hat

the

voic

es

are

sayi

ng is

a b

it on

e-si

ded.

Hel

p th

e pa

tient

to

reco

gnis

e th

e po

sitiv

es:

“Alw

ays

rem

ind

your

self:

‘I’m

doi

ng m

y be

st’”

.

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 04

Page 274: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

3. WEIGH PROS & CONS OF WHAT VOICES SAY.

1. Explore the content of the voices: “Can you tell me the sort of thing the voices say?” “Why do you think they’re saying that?”

2. Help patient to recognise that the voices are related to them. “Is there any truth to that?” Do you think you’re that bad?” “What is it that’s bad?”

“What are the good things about you?”

3. Remind them we all have positives and negatives: what the voices are saying is a bit one-sided. Help the

patient to recognise the positives:

“Always remind yourself: ‘I’m doing my best’”.

WORKING WITH NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS:

Re-conceptualise: Negative symptoms are protective against stress and positive

symptoms.

BUILD RESILIENCE & EMPOWERMENT:

You can’t push patients out of negative symptoms.

Goal: To feel better able to cope, in control and not under pressure.

Pushing too hard makes people demoralised. Allow them to stand back and have a

healing period (broken leg analogy).

“Take it easy” “When you feel ready..” “If you don’t want to do anything that’s fine, come back in two weeks and we’ll review”

REALISTIC BUT GRADUATED GOAL/TARGET SETTING:

Set a short-term goal: has to come from patient (What did you used to do that you might

like to do?)

Set a long-term goal (3-5 years): has to come from patient.

PAGE 138 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

WO

RKIN

G W

ITH

NEG

ATIV

E SY

MPT

OM

S:

Re-

con

cep

tual

ise

: Neg

ativ

e sy

mpt

oms

are

prot

ectiv

e ag

ains

t st

ress

and

posi

tive

sym

ptom

s.

BU

ILD

RES

ILIE

NC

E &

EM

PO

WER

MEN

T:

You

can’

t pu

sh p

atie

nts

out

of n

egat

ive

sym

ptom

s.

Go

al: T

o fe

el b

ette

r ab

le t

o co

pe, i

n co

ntro

l and

not

und

er p

ress

ure.

Push

ing

too

hard

mak

es p

eopl

e de

mor

alis

ed. A

llow

the

m t

o st

and

back

and

have

a h

ealin

g pe

riod

(bro

ken

leg

anal

ogy)

.

“Tak

e it

easy

“Whe

n yo

u fe

el r

eady

..”

“If

you

don’

t w

ant

to d

o an

ythi

ng t

hat’

s fin

e, c

ome

back

in t

wo

wee

ks

and

we’

ll re

view

REA

LIST

IC B

UT

GR

AD

UAT

ED G

OA

L/TA

RG

ET S

ETTI

NG

:

Set

a sh

ort-

term

goa

l: ha

s to

com

e fr

om p

atie

nt (

Wha

t di

d yo

u us

ed t

o do

that

you

mig

ht li

ke t

o do

?)

Set

a lo

ng-t

erm

goa

l (3-

5 ye

ars)

: has

to

com

e fr

om p

atie

nt.

CO

LLA

BO

RAT

IVEL

Y SE

T SM

AR

T G

OA

LS:

Spec

ific

Mea

sura

ble

Ach

ieva

ble

Rele

vant

Tim

e-bo

und

NO

RM

ALI

SIN

G T

HE

ILLN

ESS:

“You

hav

e an

illn

ess”

→ S

elec

t de

pend

ing

on w

hat

the

patie

nt is

as

king

: “It

is n

ot u

ncom

mon

for

peo

ple

to h

ave

expe

rienc

es li

ke

the

ones

you

’ve

desc

ribed

. Our

bra

ins

can

easi

ly b

ecom

e pa

rano

id

(or

depr

esse

d or

…).

Whi

le w

e do

n’t

know

exa

ctly

wha

t ca

uses

sc

hizo

phre

nia,

it s

eem

s to

be

a co

mbi

natio

n of

the

gen

es w

e in

herit

, how

our

bra

in w

orks

and

str

ess.

“Man

y pe

ople

with

sch

izop

hren

ia n

ow n

ever

hav

e to

go

into

ho

spita

l and

are

abl

e to

set

tle d

own,

wor

k an

d ha

ve la

stin

g re

latio

nshi

ps. F

or e

very

5 p

eopl

e w

ith s

chiz

ophr

enia

: 1 w

ill g

et

bett

er w

ithin

5 y

ears

of

thei

r fir

st o

bvio

us s

ympt

oms,

3 w

ill g

et

bett

er b

ut m

ay h

ave

times

tha

t th

ey w

ill b

e w

orse

aga

in, a

nd 1

will

ha

ve t

roub

leso

me

sym

ptom

s fo

r lo

nger

per

iods

of

time”

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 05

Page 275: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

COLLABORATIVELY SET SMART GOALS:

✓ Specific

✓ Measurable

✓ Achievable

✓ Relevant

✓ Time-bound

NORMALISING THE ILLNESS:

“You have an illness” → Select depending on what the patient is asking: “It is not uncommon for people to have experiences like the ones you’ve described. Our brains can easily become paranoid (or depressed or …). While we don’t know exactly what causes schizophrenia, it seems to be a combination of the genes we inherit, how our brain works and stress.”

“Many people with schizophrenia now never have to go into hospital and are able to settle down, work and have lasting relationships. For every 5 people with schizophrenia: 1 will get better within 5 years of their first obvious symptoms, 3 will get better but may have times that they will be worse again, and 1 will have troublesome symptoms for longer periods of time”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 139

SHAR

ED D

ECIS

ION

MAK

ING

:

STEP

1: E

XPLA

IN T

REA

TMEN

T O

PTI

ON

S

List

all

poss

ible

tre

atm

ent

optio

ns (i

nclu

ding

the

opt

ion

“no

actio

n”)

Allo

ws

the

patie

nt t

o ge

t an

ove

rvie

w o

f th

e de

cisi

on s

truc

ture

“Thi

s pr

oble

m h

as 3

pos

sibl

e so

lutio

ns, A

, B o

r C

. Let

’s n

ow c

onsi

der

thes

e op

tions

in m

ore

deta

il.”

Expl

ain

the

pros

and

con

s of

opt

ions

Use

lang

uage

to

mat

ch p

atie

nt’s

und

erst

andi

ng

STEP

2:C

HEC

K P

REF

EREN

CE,

UN

DER

STA

ND

ING

AN

D C

ON

CER

NS

Expl

ore

patie

nt’s

exp

ecta

tions

, con

cern

s, u

nder

stan

ding

& p

refe

rred

leve

l

of in

volv

emen

t in

dec

isio

n m

akin

g.

Off

er o

ppor

tuni

ty t

o as

k qu

estio

ns.

“Wha

t do

you

thi

nk a

bout

wha

t I’v

e sa

id?”

“W

hat

are

your

fee

lings

abo

ut t

his?

” “D

o yo

u ha

ve c

once

rns?

” “T

ell m

e m

ore

abou

t th

em!”

“W

hat

do y

ou e

xpec

t…?”

Use

EA

R Sk

ills

STEP

3: N

EGO

TIAT

E

Neg

otia

ting

a tr

eatm

ent

optio

n.

Exch

ange

vie

ws

abou

t op

tions

“Hav

e yo

u co

me

to a

vie

w a

bout

thi

s is

sue?

Wor

k w

ith t

he p

atie

nt’s

con

cern

s, a

nd m

ake

expl

icit

both

pre

fere

nces

& r

easo

ns f

or e

ach

“I c

an s

ee h

ow X

X is

impo

rtan

t fo

r yo

u an

d I w

ould

like

you

to

co

nsid

er X

X…

Stat

e ow

n an

d pa

tient

’s p

refe

renc

es a

nd r

easo

ns

STEP

4.A

RR

AN

GE

A F

OLL

OW

-UP

OF

DEC

ISIO

N

Cla

rify

the

deci

sion

mad

e an

d ar

rang

e a

revi

ew o

f de

cisi

on.

Dec

isio

n ca

n in

volv

e de

ferm

ent

or a

ccep

tanc

e th

at t

ime

is r

equi

red

for

furt

her

info

rmat

ion

to b

e ob

tain

ed a

nd t

o re

flect

.

“Per

haps

you

wou

ld li

ke s

ome

time

to c

onsi

der

wha

t w

e ha

ve d

iscu

ssed

, an

d w

e co

uld

talk

abo

ut it

aga

in a

t yo

ur n

ext

appo

intm

ent?

If no

dec

isio

n re

ache

d, d

ecid

e on

nex

t st

eps

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 06

Page 276: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

SHARED DECISION MAKING:

STEP 1: EXPLAIN TREATMENT OPTIONS

List all possible treatment options (including the option “no action”)

Allows the patient to get an overview of the decision structure

“This problem has 3 possible solutions, A, B or C. Let’s now consider these options in more detail.”

Explain the pros and cons of options

Use language to match patient’s understanding

STEP 2:CHECK PREFERENCE, UNDERSTANDING AND CONCERNS

Explore patient’s expectations, concerns, understanding & preferred level of

involvement in decision making.

Offer opportunity to ask questions.

“What do you think about what I’ve said?” “What are your feelings about this?” “Do you have concerns?” “Tell me more about them!” “What do you expect…?”

Use EAR Skills

STEP 3: NEGOTIATE

Negotiating a treatment option.

Exchange views about options

“Have you come to a view about this issue?”

Work with the patient’s concerns, and make explicit both preferences & reasons for each

“I can see how XX is important for you and I would like you to consider XX…”

State own and patient’s preferences and reasons

STEP 4.ARRANGE A FOLLOW-UP OF DECISION

Clarify the decision made and arrange a review of decision.

Decision can involve deferment or acceptance that time is required for

further information to be obtained and to reflect.

“Perhaps you would like some time to consider what we have discussed, and we could talk about it again at your next appointment?”

If no decision reached, decide on next steps

PAGE 140 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

NEG

OTI

ATIO

N:

Mee

ting

resi

stan

ce w

ith f

orce

cre

ates

mor

e re

sist

ance

. Try

to

mov

e in

dire

ctio

n w

ith t

he p

atie

nt -

it is

bet

ter

to w

ork

with

whe

re t

hey

are

mor

e

will

ing

to m

ove

and

not

whe

re t

hey

are

mos

t re

sist

ant.

Whe

n di

ffer

ent v

iew

s an

d di

sagr

eem

ent o

ccur

– s

tep

back

! By

ste

ppin

g ba

ck,

and

bein

g le

ss fo

rcef

ul, t

he o

ther

per

son

is m

ore

likel

y to

mod

ify p

ositi

on.

STR

ATEG

IES

FOR

NEG

OTI

ATIO

N:

1. A

pp

ly E

AR

Ski

lls: E

xplo

re, L

iste

n A

ctiv

ely,

Res

po

nd

:

Peop

le a

re m

ore

likel

y to

list

en if

the

y fe

el h

eard

:

“So

you

said

you

wan

t to

red

uce

your

med

icat

ion.

Tel

l me

mor

e.”

Refle

ct b

ack

the

patie

nt’s

sta

tem

ents

to

ackn

owle

dge:

“I’m

gla

d th

at y

ou’v

e to

ld m

e ab

out

thes

e th

ings

. Cle

arly

, thi

s

is d

ifficu

lt.”

Sum

mar

ise

wha

t th

e pa

tient

has

tol

d yo

u.

2. B

ein

g r

esp

ecte

d, h

eard

an

d in

volv

ed:

Ope

n tw

o-w

ay d

iscu

ssio

n an

d de

velo

p a

part

ners

hip.

Giv

e

perm

issi

on t

o di

sagr

ee a

nd t

o te

ll yo

u th

ings

tha

t yo

u do

n’t

wan

t

to h

ear:

“I k

now

som

e of

my

patie

nts

som

etim

es d

on’t

tak

e th

eir

med

icat

ion.

I w

onde

r ho

w y

ou f

eel a

bout

thi

s….?

Don

’t m

inim

ise

side

eff

ects

: “Th

e si

de e

ffec

ts a

ren’

t in

tole

rabl

e,

are

they

?”

Don

’t ‘s

ell’

by p

ushi

ng a

ll th

e ad

vant

ages

& g

loss

ing

/

igno

ring

disa

dvan

tage

s.

3. D

ou

ble

-sid

ed r

eflec

tio

n:

Pros

and

Con

s. R

eflec

t bo

th t

he c

urre

nt s

tate

men

t an

d a

prev

ious

cont

radi

ctor

y st

atem

ent

at t

he s

ame

time:

“How

diffi

cult

– on

the

one

han

d yo

u ar

e un

happ

y ab

out

the

side

ef

fect

s, o

n th

e ot

her

hand

you

say

the

med

icat

ion

does

red

uce

the

dist

ress

ing

voic

es a

nd y

ou h

ave

been

abl

e to

go

out.”

4. G

ain

yo

urs

elf

a h

eari

ng

:

Hav

ing

sum

mar

ised

wha

t yo

u ha

ve u

nder

stoo

d fr

om t

he p

atie

nt p

ut

your

ow

n vi

ews

acro

ss:

“N

ow c

an I

expl

ain

how

I se

e th

ings

?”

“I

wou

ld r

ecom

men

d ...

“The

rea

son

I thi

nk t

his

…”

“W

hat

do y

ou t

hink

abo

ut w

hat

I hav

e sa

id?”

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 07

Page 277: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

NEGOTIATION:

Meeting resistance with force creates more resistance. Try to move in direction with the

patient - it is better to work with where they are more willing to move and not where

they are most resistant.

When different views and disagreement occur – step back! By stepping back, and being

less forceful, the other person is more likely to modify position.

STRATEGIES FOR NEGOTIATION:

1. Apply EAR Skills: Explore, Listen Actively, Respond: People are more likely to listen if they feel heard:

“So you said you want to reduce your medication. Tell me more.”

Reflect back the patient’s statements to acknowledge:

“I’m glad that you’ve told me about these things. Clearly, this is difficult.”

Summarise what the patient has told you.

2. Being respected, heard and involved: Open two-way discussion and develop a partnership. Give permission to disagree

and to tell you things that you don’t want to hear:

“I know some of my patients sometimes don’t take their medication. I wonder how you feel about this….?”

Don’t minimise side effects: “The side effects aren’t intolerable, are they?”

Don’t ‘sell’ by pushing all the advantages & glossing/ ignoring disadvantages.

3. Double-sided reflection: Pros and Cons. Reflect both the current statement and a previous contradictory

statement at the same time:

“How difficult – on the one hand you are unhappy about the side effects, on the other hand you say the medication does reduce the distressing voices and you have been able to go out.”

4. Gain yourself a hearing: Having summarised what you have understood from the patient put your own

views across:

“Now can I explain how I see things?” “I would recommend ...”

“The reason I think this …” “What do you think about what I have said?”

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 141

5. N

ego

tiat

e an

d c

om

pro

mis

e:

Con

trac

t se

ttin

g: “

We

both

fee

l diff

eren

tly a

bout

thi

s, s

o pe

rhap

s w

e co

uld

agre

e to

try

… a

nd r

eass

ess

how

we

both

fee

l at

the

next

ap

poin

tmen

t?”

Shar

ing

resp

onsi

bilit

y: “

Lets

rec

ap. Y

ou w

ould

like

to

…. F

or x

re

ason

s I w

ould

be

conc

erne

d an

d re

com

men

d th

at y

ou…

.Do

you

see

a w

ay w

e ca

n re

ach

a co

mpr

omis

e?”

Ope

n di

sclo

sure

: “I d

on’t

fee

l com

fort

able

in t

his…

Agr

ee t

o di

ffer

in o

pini

on t

o le

ave

the

door

s op

en f

or f

utur

e

disc

ussi

on: “

It’s

ver

y he

lpfu

l tha

t w

e’ve

had

thi

s di

scus

sion

alth

ough

w

e se

e th

ings

diff

eren

tly.”

HAN

DO

UT

4D: S

KILL

S BO

OKL

ET S

ESSI

ON

4

PAG

E 08

Page 278: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

5. Negotiate and compromise: Contract setting: “We both feel differently about this, so perhaps we could agree

to try… and reassess how we both feel at the next appointment?”

Sharing responsibility: “Lets recap. You would like to …. For x reasons I would be concerned and recommend that you….Do you see a way we can reach a compromise?”

Open disclosure: “I don’t feel comfortable in this…”

Agree to differ in opinion to leave the doors open for future discussion: “It’s very helpful that we’ve had this discussion although we see things differently.”

PAGE 142 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 279: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

INDIVIDUALISED FEEDBACK SESSION

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 143

Page 280: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

ACTION PLANS FOR IMPLEMENTING NEW SKILLS

See instruction for individualised feedback in guidance for facilitators

EAR-SKILLS AGENDA SETTING ACTION POINTS

Explore Explore patient’s goals for the consultation

Clarify understanding

Listen Actively

Reflect patient’s statement

Summarize periodically, invite patient to revise

Check understanding

Respond Explain your own priorities

Set priorities/agenda for this consultation

Refer back to set agenda & recap

EAR-SKILLS RESPONDING TO POSITIVE SYMPTOMS

ACTION POINTS

Explore Explore patient’s story of belief/voices

Socratic dialogue: discuss phenomena

Explore individuality of perception & origin

Listen Actively

Show understanding & interest

Check understanding of voices

Make patient feel understood & heard

Respond Establish nature of evidence

Normalize (most people…)

Debate

Weigh pros & cons of what voices say

Acknowledge distress

PAGE 144 | TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS

Page 281: General description form for teaching tools · List of tool files TEMPO_Training manual.pdf Slides session 1.pptx Slides session 2.pptx Slides session 3.pptx Slides session 4.pptx

EAR-SKILLS RE-CONCEPTUALIZING NEGATIVE SYMPTOMS

ACTION POINTS

Explore Explore short-term and long-term goals

Explore feelings & symptoms

Listen Actively

Acknowledge patient’s feelings & concerns

Summarize periodically

Respond Take the pressure off – pull back

Collaboratively select goal (SMART) ➞ has to come from patient

Help patient to get back in to control again

EAR-SKILLS DECISION MAKING ACTION POINTS

Explore Explore preference, understanding & concern

Listen Actively

Reflect back patient’s statement to acknowledge

Double-sided reflection: pros & cons

Summarize

Respond Explain treatment options

Give permission to disagree & tell you things you don’t want to hear

Negotiate: Step back, and be less forceful

Agree to differ

➞ Negotiate & compromise

Summarize what has been said

Reach compromise & review decision

TEMPO TRAINING MANUAL FOR FACILITATORS | PAGE 145